Saab Automobile 5 Sep User Guide

1
Owner’s Manual  
Saab 9-5, Model Year 2004  
Safety  
11  
Security 39  
Instruments and controls 53  
Saab 9-5 Audio System 85  
OnStar - Telematics 107  
Interior equipment and trunk 119  
Starting and driving 147  
Car care and technical information 199  
Customer Assistance and Information 263  
Specifications 269  
Index 283  
©
Saab Automobile AB 2003  
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden  
Printed in Sweden  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Instrument panel  
Indicator and warning lights______  
Speedometer_________________  
Odometer and trip meter ________  
Fuel gauge___________________  
Temperature gauge ____________  
54  
61  
60  
61  
61  
Saab Information Display (SID) ___  
Night panel___________________  
Clock _______________________  
63  
67  
68  
Parking lights____________ 69  
High/low beam __________ 69  
Daytime running lights_____ 69  
Instrument illumination ____ 71  
Changing bulbs__________ 215  
Hazard warning lights_____  
72  
Wipers and washers______  
Rear-window wiper (9-5  
73  
74  
Turn signal and lane change  
Wagon) _______________  
indicators ______________ 71  
High beam flasher________ 69  
Cruise control ___________ 167  
Rain sensing wipers (option) 73  
Washers_______________ 214  
Wipers and washers______ 213  
Front fog lights (certain mod-  
els)___________________ 72  
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___  
Steering-wheel controls ___ 102  
85  
Steering-wheel controls ___ 102  
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 163  
Automatic climate control  
(ACC) ________________  
75  
Air conditioning (ACC) ____ 252  
Electric heating, front seats______  
Ventilated front seats___________  
15  
15  
Ashtrays (accessory)___________ 131  
Cigarette lighters (accessory) ____ 132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Exterior  
Driving with a roof rack load______ 183  
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory) 183  
Maximum roof load ____________ 270  
Rearview mirror _______________ 122  
Hood _______________________ 200  
Engine compartment: washing ___ 255  
Sunroof ________________ 128  
Washing the car _________ 254  
Waxing and polishing _____ 255  
Touching up the paint _____ 255  
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 256  
Headlights _____________  
High/low beam __________  
Turn signal and lane change  
indicators______________  
Headlight washers (certain  
models) _______________  
69  
69  
71  
73  
Changing bulbs _________ 215  
Headlights______________ 69  
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan 220  
Rear lights clusters, 9-5  
Wagon ________________ 222  
Changing bulbs__________ 215  
Central locking __________  
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan __  
Tailgate, 9-5 SportWagon__  
Child safety locks ________  
Car alarm ______________  
40  
44  
45  
43  
46  
Towing a trailer __________ 178  
Towing the car___________ 188  
Rear towing eye _________ 189  
Trunk _______________________ 135  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan __ 135  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon _ 138  
Trunk Release Handle__________ 144  
Spare wheel and tools__________ 145  
Compact spare tire ____________ 246  
b
Fuel gauge___________________  
61  
Tires pressure ________________ 279  
Wheels and tires ______________ 278  
Braking______________________ 168  
Driving in cold weather__________ 176  
Compact spare tire_____________ 246  
Changing a wheel _____________ 247  
Fuel filler flap _________________ 153  
Refueling ____________________ 154  
Economical motoring___________ 174  
Fuel ________________________ 272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Interior  
Interior lighting________________ 130  
Sunroof _____________________ 128  
Dome light, front ______________ 225  
Rearview mirrors ______________ 121  
Door mirrors__________________ 121  
Sun visors ___________________ 131  
Steering wheel adjustment _ 120  
Airbag _________________ 31  
Power steering fluid_______ 209  
Steering-wheel controls ___ 102  
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 163  
Safety belts ____________  
Airbag_________________  
Child safety ____________  
Child safety locks ________  
17  
31  
23  
43  
Safety belts ____________ 253  
Seats__________________ 12  
Electric heating, front seats_ 15  
Ventilated front seats______ 15  
Safety belts _____________ 17  
Child safety _____________ 23  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5  
Glove compartment ______ 132  
Sedan ________________ 135  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5  
Wagon ________________ 138  
Upholstery and trim_______ 253  
Side airbags ____________ 35  
Manual transmission _____ 158  
Automatic transmission ___ 159  
Electric windows ______________ 127  
Ignition switch ________________ 148  
Starting the engine ____________ 149  
Engine Break-In Period _________ 157  
Driving in hot weather __________ 177  
Driving in cold weather _________ 176  
Parking _____________________ 196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Engine compartment  
Engine ______________________ 203  
Checking the oil level___________ 204  
Changing engine oil____________ 204  
Engine oil, specification_________ 273  
Braking______________________ 168  
ABS brakes __________________ 169  
Brake and clutch fluid___________ 208  
Brake system _________________ 277  
Brake pads___________________ 277  
Warning labels __________  
7
V.I.N. number ___________ 280  
Engine number __________ 280  
Gearbox number _________ 280  
Color code______________ 280  
Fuses _________________ 227  
Changing a fuse_________ 229  
Relays ________________ 230  
Table of fuses___________ 227  
Power steering fluid_______ 209  
Steering, technical data ___ 277  
Temperature gauge ______  
61  
Driving in hot weather_____ 177  
Driving in cold weather____ 176  
Coolant________________ 207  
Coolant capacity_________ 272  
Ignition switch ___________ 148  
Drive belts______________ 212  
Spark plugs_____________ 275  
Catalytic converter _______ 152  
Wipers and washers______  
73  
Washers_______________ 214  
Washer jets ____________ 214  
Important considerations for driving 151  
Turbo unit ___________________ 201  
Engine, technical data__________ 272  
Manual transmission ___________ 158  
Automatic transmission _________ 159  
Automatic transmission,  
technical data ________________ 276  
Manual gearbox, technical data___ 276  
Jump starting _________________ 191  
Battery ______________________ 210  
Charging/replacing the battery____ 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
A/C system  
Warning labels  
Refrigerant at high pressure.  
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before  
discharging the A/C system. Improper service methods  
may cause personal injury. System to be serviced by  
authorized personnel only. For instructions consult  
workshop manual.  
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.  
Charge: 825 g of R134a.  
Radiator fan  
Compressor oil: PAG oil SP-10 alt.  
Saab oil 4759106  
Radiator fan may start at any  
time.  
Oil amount: See workshop manual.  
Brake fluid  
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE  
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4  
FLUID FROM SEALED  
CONTAINER.  
• AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES,  
NO SMOKING  
• WEAR EYE PROTECTION  
• KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN  
• ACID  
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL  
• FLAMMABLE GAS  
Battery  
• No sparks, flames or smoking.  
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.  
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns.  
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.  
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery.  
Coolant:  
Never open when engine hot!  
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Jack  
Jack is designed only for changing a tire or  
mounting tire snow chains.  
Vehicle must be level and the jack must be  
placed on a firm and level ground.  
Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is  
jacked up.  
Contacta Saabdealerifa  
xenon headlight requires  
replacement.  
Thislabelisonlyfoundon  
cars with xenon head-  
lights.  
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS  
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to  
park.  
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to  
be changed (See illustration).  
3 Crank jack so that car begins to lift.  
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel  
bolts one-half turn.  
CANADA  
5 Raisevehiclesothattireclearsground. Loosen  
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.  
6 Mountsparewheelandtightenboltsenoughso  
wheel is not loose.  
7 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross  
sequence.  
USA  
WARNING  
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.  
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag  
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children  
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front  
• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag  
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS  
Jack  
Use on level ground only. Use vehicle support stands. Safe  
working load 900 kg (1900 lbs).  
For more information see your owner´s manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Examples of symbols that can be found in your car  
No sparks,  
flames or  
smoking.  
Windshield  
wipers  
Coolant  
Buckle up  
Airbag  
Headlights  
Radiator fan  
Fuel  
temperature  
Useprotective  
goggles  
Direction  
indicators  
Windshield  
washers  
Battery  
charging  
Keep out of  
reach of  
children.  
Electric  
windows  
Parking lights  
Defroster  
Foot brake  
Battery acid  
contains  
sulfuric acid.  
Deactivating  
ofrearwindow  
switches  
Hazard  
warning lights  
Rear window  
heating  
Coolant level  
Refer to the  
Owner’s  
Manual.  
Central  
locking, lock  
Front fog  
lights  
Engine oil  
pressure  
Ventilation fan  
Central  
locking,  
unlock  
Risk of  
explosive gas.  
Rear fog  
light  
ABS brakes  
Trunk  
lid/tailgate,  
opening  
Never place a  
rear-facing  
child seat in  
this seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
(This page has been left blank)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
11  
Safety  
Seats _________________ 12  
Head restraint __________ 16  
Safety belts ____________ 17  
Child safety ____________ 23  
Airbag_________________ 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12  
Safety  
The following seat adjustments can be  
made to achieve a comfortable driving  
position:  
Seats  
WARNING  
• height  
• legroom  
The seats are actuated by powerful  
motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting  
the seat, and make sure that nothing gets  
caught and damaged. Ensure that noth-  
ing can be trapped when adjusting the  
seat.  
• backrest rake angle  
• lumbar support  
• head-restraint height  
We recommend that adjustments to the  
driver’s seat be performed in the following  
order:  
Bear in mind that children can be injured  
if they play with the electrically-operated  
seats.  
1 height  
2 legroom  
Alwaysremovetheignitionkeywhenyou  
leave the car to prevent personal injury  
caused by the electrically adjustable  
seats, for example, due to children play-  
ing.  
3 seat tilt angle  
4 backrest rake angle  
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see page  
120).  
Height  
To raise the seat, lift the lower control  
straight up.  
To lower the seat, press the lower control  
down.  
The same control can be used to adjust the  
height of the frontand rear edgesoftheseat  
independently.  
Both front seats are electrically operated.  
On certain models the driver´s seat is  
equipped with a memory function.  
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats  
can be adjusted when either of the front  
doors is open.  
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the  
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition  
is ON.  
Note, however, that both seats can be  
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors  
have been closed.  
WARNING  
Never adjust the driver’s seat except  
when the car is stationary.  
Side airbags  
(see page 35).  
Head restraint  
(see page 16).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety  
13  
Legroom adjustment  
To adjust the legroom, push the lower  
control forward or back.  
Backrest rake angle  
To adjust the backrest, move the upper  
control forward or back.  
Lumbar support  
Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-  
ment of the lumbar support.  
WARNING  
The backrest should be upright during  
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and  
backrest can provide optimum protection  
in the event of emergency braking or a  
crash and in particular a rear-end colli-  
sion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Safety  
To recall the programmed settings, press  
the appropriate preset button, whereupon  
the seat and mirrors will be adjusted auto-  
matically.  
To change the settings stored in a preset  
button, adjusttheseatandmirrorsasbefore  
and save the new settings by pressing M  
and the appropriate preset button.  
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side  
door mirror can be tilted down automati-  
cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,  
select reverse and press the tiny button  
adjacent to the door-mirror control. When  
you deselect reverse, the mirror will return  
to its original setting automatically (see  
page 121).  
Programmable driver’s seat (certain  
models only)  
In certain models the driver´s seat is  
equipped with a programmable memory  
function. This function also includes the  
door mirrors.  
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.  
To save the settings, press and hold the M  
button and, at the same time, press one of  
the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The Saab  
Information Display (SID) will chime to  
confirm that the settings have been saved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
15  
Ventilated front seats  
(option)  
Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating  
comfort in hot weather, is an option on Arc  
and Aero models (certain markets).  
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans  
that extract the moist air from between the  
seat and the body.  
Electric heating, front seats  
Both front seats have adjustable and ther-  
mostat-controlled heating of the seat cush-  
ion and backrest, available as an option.  
Heating is adjustable in three stages. In  
position 0 it is turned off.  
The fans have three speeds and are OFF  
when the switch is set to 0.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16  
Safety  
Head restraint  
WARNING  
• Adjust the head restraint so that your  
head is optimally supported and the  
center of the head restraint is at ear  
height, thus reducing the likelihood of  
neck injury in a crash.  
• Raise the head restraints in the seat  
that are occupied.  
The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are  
Rear-seat head restraints  
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have  
three adjustment positions for passenger  
comfort.  
They can also be folded down to increase  
the driver’s rearward visionwhen the seat is  
unoccupied.  
9-5 SportWagon: The height of the rear  
head restraints can be adjusted by depress-  
ing the catch on the left-hand collar in the  
same way as the front head restraints.  
equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints  
(SAHRs). Thesereduce the risk ofwhiplash  
injury if the car is hit from behind.  
The head restraint can be raised or lowered  
and is adjustable in various positions.  
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is  
forced back against the backrest. This, in  
turn, causes the mechanism to press the  
head restraint forward and upward, thus  
limiting the backward movement of the  
head.  
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-  
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt  
into the top of the backrest, where it is  
connected to the head restraint.  
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both  
sides and pull it straight up.  
• Lowering:pressthecatchontheleft-hand  
sideoftheattachingpointandpressdown  
the head restraint.  
Therefore, the SAHR does not need to be  
replaced after a minor rear-end crash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety  
17  
Safety belts  
WARNING  
WARNING  
In the event of a crash, the rear-seat  
passengers not wearing a seatbelt will  
thrown forward against the front-seat  
backrests. The stresses imposed on the  
front seat passengers and belts are multi-  
plied and can result in needless injury or  
even death for all car occupants.  
Safety belts must be worn at all times by  
all car occupants.  
FASTEN BELTS  
Child safety, see page 23.  
Check that the locking tongue is properly  
locked in the belt lock.  
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are  
provided for all seats.  
Research has established that it is just as  
dangerous for rear seat passengers not to  
wear their safety belts as it is for front seat  
passengers.  
WARNING  
Safety-belt reminder  
Whentheignitionisswitchedon, thefasten  
belts” reminder will light up until the driver  
fastens the safety belt. In addition an audi-  
ble signal sounds for 6 seconds, or until the  
driver fastens his belt.  
Adjustments of the safety belt should be  
done when the car is stationary so that  
attention to traffic is not reduced.  
Bearinmindthat incertainstates it is alegal  
requirement for all occupants of the car to  
wear a safety belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18  
Safety  
Safety belt pretensioners  
The belts of the front seats are fitted with  
automatic pretensioners and force limiters.  
These are activated in the event of a severe  
frontal or rear-end crash and a side-on colli-  
sion, providedthatthesafetybeltsarebeing  
worn.  
The pretensioners serve to reduce the  
forward movement of the body by tension-  
ing the belt. The force limiters reduce belt  
loads on the body by "loosening" the safety  
belt to absorb the body’s kinetic energy as  
gradually as possible.  
WARNING  
Proper positioning of the safety belt is  
extremely important. An out of position  
safety belt can result in the wearer sliding  
underneath the belt in a crash (submarin-  
ing) and injury can result from the lap  
portion cutting into the abdomen.  
• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted  
or rubbing against any sharp edges.  
• There should not be any slack in the belt.  
Pull the belt tight – particularly important  
when thick outer clothing is worn.  
The safety belt pretensioners are not acti-  
vated by vehicle rollover.  
Correctly positioned safety belt  
• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan  
necessary, as the safety belt provides  
better protection when the seat is in the  
more upright position.  
Correct position for safety belt  
WARNING  
• The lap portion of the belt should be  
pulled as tightly as comfortable and as  
low as possible across the hips, so that it  
is just touching the top of the thighs. The  
shoulder belt should be well in on the  
shoulder but not touching the neck.  
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety  
belts, belt pretensioners and other  
components must be inspected by an  
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as  
necessary.  
• Only one person per safety belt!  
WARNING  
Never make any alterations or repairs to  
the safety belt yourself. Visit an autho-  
rized Saab dealer for any necessary  
repairs.  
If two people share a belt, they risk injury  
by being crushed together in the event of  
a crash.  
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,  
theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom  
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-  
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn  
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are  
applied hard or a crash occurs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
19  
• Children who have grown out of a child  
seat should be restrained by the car’s  
standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat  
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the  
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-  
ion may be necessary.  
WARNING  
Never fasten the safety belt with the  
shoulder belt behind the body or pull the  
belt off the shoulder and under the arm.  
To fasten the belt  
Press the red button to release the belt  
Front safety belts  
To release the belt, press the red button on  
the belt buckle, as illustrated.  
See page 253 for the checking of belt func-  
tion, cleaning, etc.  
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-  
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is  
securely fastened.  
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle  
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to  
tighten the lap belt part.  
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out  
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be  
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt  
is well in on the shoulder.  
Because the lower belt-anchorage points  
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the  
movement of the seat during seat adjust-  
ment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Safety  
Belt height adjustment  
The front safety belts and the outside belts  
in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with  
automatic height adjustment.  
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest  
height, pull it out and, without letting go,  
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.  
Make sure that the belt is well in on the  
shoulder.  
Safety belt use during pregnancy  
Pregnant women must always wear a  
safety belt to protect both themselves and  
the unborn child.  
The lap belt should be placed low, across  
the hips and over the upper thighs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
21  
Securing an item on the rear seat  
Safety belt, rear seat  
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the  
shoulder as possible.  
To release the belt, press the red button on  
the belt lock.  
See page 253 for the checking of belt func-  
tion, cleaning, etc.  
Safety belt, rear seat  
Three-point safety belts are provided for all  
three rear seat passengers.  
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-  
fully and inserting the tongue in the lock.  
Check that it is securely fastened.  
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near  
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards  
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap  
strap should lie low over the hips.  
WARNING  
• Make sure that the belt does not  
become trapped when the backrest is  
folded down or raised (see page 135).  
• If a cargo has to be placed on a seat,  
it must be properly secured with the  
safetybelt. Thisreducestheriskof the  
cargo being thrown about during hard  
braking or a crash, which could cause  
personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Safety  
• Check that the belt is not twisted or  
lying against sharp edges.  
Each belt assembly must only be used by  
one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt  
around a child being carried on the occu-  
pant´s lap.  
WARNING  
• Make sure you use the correct safety  
belt buckle. The buckles for the center  
and left-hand rear seats are close  
together.  
Safety belts are designed to bear upon  
thebonystructureofthebody,andshould  
be worn low across the front of the pelvis  
or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as  
applicable; wearing the lap section of the  
belt across the abdominal area must be  
avoided.  
No modifications or additions should be  
madebytheuserwhichwilleitherprevent  
the safety belt adjustingdevice from oper-  
ating to remove slack, or prevent the  
safety belt assembly from being adjusted  
to remove slack.  
Safety belts should be adjusted as firmly  
as possible, consistent with comfort, to  
providetheprotectionforwhichtheyhave  
been designed. A loose belt will greatly  
reduce the protection afforded to the  
wearer.  
Care should be taken to avoid contamina-  
tion of the webbing with polishes, oils and  
chemicals, and particularly battery acid.  
Cleaning may safely be carried out using  
mild soap and water. The belt should be  
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,  
contaminated or damaged.  
It is essential to replace the entire assem-  
bly after it has been worn in a severe  
impact even if damage to the assembly is  
not obvious.  
Belts should not be worn with straps  
twisted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
23  
Car safety tips  
Child safety  
WARNING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• Children must always be suitably  
Never leave children unattended in a  
car, even for a short time.  
– Children can suffer heat stroke – per-  
haps die – in a matter of minutes.  
– Children can put the car into gear and  
hurt themselves or others.  
Protect children from getting  
trapped in the trunk of a car  
restrained in the car.  
• DEATH or SERIOUS  
INJURY can occur.  
• Teach childrennot toplay in or around  
cars.  
• Children12andunderor  
shorter than 55 inches  
(140 cm) can be killed by  
the airbag.  
• Watch children when loading or  
unloading the car so they don’t get  
locked in by mistake.  
• At gas stations, take the keys from the  
car while filling the tank.  
Always lock the doors and trunk of  
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-  
dren´s sight and reach.  
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace  
for children.  
Never allow children to climb on top of  
– or under cars.  
NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in  
Always look for children before back-  
ing your car out of a garage or drive-  
way.  
• Keep the rear fold-down seats closed  
to help prevent kids from getting into  
the trunk from inside the car.  
the front.  
• Sit as far back as possible from the  
airbag.  
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,  
never let a car idle in the garage.  
For Trunk Release Handle information see  
page 44 and 144.  
ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and  
CHILDREN RESTRAINTS.  
• Supervise young children around  
buckets of water while washing your  
car. Small children can drown in a  
short time in less than an inch of water.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
24  
Safety  
The same attention must be given to child  
safety in the car as is given to adults.  
Saab recommends rearward facing child  
restraints.  
Children travel most safely when properly  
restrained, but restraints must be suitable  
for the size of the child. Always follow the  
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s  
instructionswheninstallingthesedevicesin  
your vehicle.  
Make sure you are acquainted with the  
legal requirements for seating children  
in the car.  
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child  
restraint in accordance with the manufac-  
turer’s child seat instructions.  
When fitting child seats in cars you must  
always read the instructionssupplied by  
the manufacturer.  
LATCH  
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers  
for CHildren) consists of top tether and  
lower anchorage (“ISOFIX”) for child  
restraints in two outboard the rear seats.  
ISOFIX are lower attachments located  
where the seat and back cushions come  
together. Top tethers are upper attach-  
ments located on parcel shelf or torsion  
beam, see page 27 and 28.  
Saab recommends rearward facing child  
restraints for children 3 and under.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
25  
There are two bars attached to the car body  
for each specially designed LATCH child  
restraint. A small labelis locatedon the seat  
back just above the outer attachment bars  
to facilitate installing the child restraint. The  
labelcontains acircleand arearwardfacing  
child restraint.  
LATCH installation  
To facilitate the proper fitting of new  
specially-designed child restraints, rigid  
lower anchorages (ISOFIX) have been  
installed to the vehicle that shall be used  
with the top tether anchorages in the two  
outboard rear seating positions. There is an  
additional top tether anchorage for the  
center rear seating position that is to be  
used together with the safety belt.  
1 Place the child restraint on the seat  
cushion.  
2 Press the child restraint rearward into  
the space between the backrest and  
cushion, lining up the restraint attach-  
ment arms with the labels.  
3 Follow the child restraint instructions to  
confirm that both restraint arms are  
properly attached to the bars.  
4 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car  
anchorage and tighten according to the  
restraint instructions, see page 27 and  
28.  
LATCH is a U.S./Canadian government  
standard for an uniform method of fitting  
child restraints without using the standard  
safety belts. Onlycertain child restraintsare  
equipped to utilize these rigid lower anchor-  
ages behind where the seat cushion and  
seat back come together. LATCH child  
seats also utilize a top tether strap that is  
found on some newer child seats that still  
require installation with the standard safety  
belts.  
5 Pull the child restraint to make a second  
check that restraint is securely attached  
at both the lower anchorage bars and  
the top tether strap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Safety  
Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top  
tether  
Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with  
top tether  
For the top tether, only use the strap  
supplied with the child restraint.  
Always follow the installation instructions  
supplied with the child restraint.  
The availability of LATCH child restraints  
may be limited.  
When fitting child seats in cars you must  
always read the instructionssupplied by  
the car seat manufacturer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
27  
9-5 Sedan:  
Child tether anchorages for forward  
facing child car seats  
1 Open the cover that is right behind the  
child restraint. Make sure it locks.  
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.  
3 Secure the lower part of the child  
restraint by means of the lower anchor-  
ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as  
described in the child restraint mounting  
instruction.  
WARNING  
4 Route the tether under the headrest.  
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage.  
6 Tighten the tether so that the back of the  
child restraint is pressed hard against  
the backrest.  
Child tether anchorages are designed to  
withstand only those loads imposed by  
correctly fitted child restraints.  
Under no circumstances are they to be  
used for adult safety belts.  
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,  
Saab 9-5 Sedan  
7 Pull the child restraints to make a  
second check that the restraints are  
securely attached at both the lower  
anchorages bars and the top tether  
strap.  
Child restraints with a tether strap must be  
anchored according to Canadian and USA  
laws.  
If you have any questions regarding child  
tether anchorages please contact your  
Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
28  
Safety  
9-5 SportWagon:  
8 Tighten the tether so that the back of the  
child restraint is pressed hard against  
the backrest.  
9 Pull the child restraints to make a  
second check that the restraints are  
securely attached at both the lower  
anchorages bars and the top tether  
strap.  
1 Fold the backrest of the rear seat  
forward, see page 135.  
2 Fold the anchor that is right behind the  
child restraint to its upright position.  
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.  
4 Raise the head restraint to its upper  
position and then route the tether under  
the head restraint.  
WARNING  
5 Attach the tether to the anchor.  
6 Raise the backrest of the rear seat.  
Make sure it locks properly.  
7 Secure the lower part of the child  
restraint by means of the safety belt or  
lower anchorages (ISOFIX) as  
Make sure the child-restraint anchorages  
are folded all the way up or down other-  
wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat  
backrest.  
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 Sport-  
Wagon  
described in the child restraint mounting  
instruction on the previous page.  
It is not possible to route the tether through  
the cargo net (accessory), if one is fitted.  
Instead we recommend a cargo guard  
(accessory).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety  
29  
Lockable belt tongue  
In fitting a child seat that is intended to be  
secured in position by the lap portion of the  
safety belt, make use of the locking function  
of the buckle.  
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens  
the risk that the seat will work loose while  
the car is in motion.  
Thebuttonforthelockingfunctionislocated  
on the back of the buckle.  
1 Position the child seat in the back of the  
car.  
2 To activate the locking function, move  
the locking button on the tongue of the  
belt to the position marked  
”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in  
order to activate the locking function.  
Locking the lap belt  
1 Locked  
2 Unlocked  
3 Secure the base of the child seat with  
the lap portion of the safety belt in accor-  
dance with the installation instructions  
accompanying the child seat.  
4 Grasptheshoulderpartofthesafetybelt  
and pull it upwards to tighten the lap  
portion against the child seat.  
5 Check for correct locking function by  
pulling on the lap portion of the belt. The  
belt must not unreel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
Safety  
Installation of child restraint using the  
standard safety belt  
Child restraints that are approved for rear-  
ward facing installation in the rear seat can  
be positioned in any of the three rear places.  
If you intend to install another make of child  
restraint make sure that it is possible to fit it  
in accordance with the manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
WARNING  
A special accessory is available for lock-  
ing the center armrest so that a child seat  
can be installed in the middle seat. See  
your Saab dealer for details.  
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in  
the center position of the rear seat in the  
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must  
be secured in place with this strap. If this  
is not done, the center armrest could  
swing down in the event of a frontal crash  
and cause injury to the child.  
WARNING  
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s  
instructions on the use of this child  
restraint system can cause your child to  
strike the vehicle´s interior during a  
sudden stop or crash.  
Fitting the locking strap on the center  
armrest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on  
SportWagon).  
The locking strap is standard equipment in  
certain markets.  
Saabrecommendsrearwardfacingchild  
restraints up to 3 years.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
31  
Note:  
Airbag  
The sensor reacts differently depending on  
whether or not the front seatbelts on the  
driver’s and passenger sides are used. Situ-  
ations can therefore arise where only one of  
the airbags inflates.  
It is also possible for only the seatbelt  
pretensioners to be activated and for the  
airbags to remain uninflated.  
The entire process takes less than  
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blink-  
ing of an eye.  
These airbags are triggered only by moder-  
atetoseverefrontalornear-frontalcrashes.  
Theywillnot be activatedbyminor front-end  
impacts, rear-end or side impacts, or by the  
car rolling over.  
WARNING  
To reduce risk of injury:  
Always wear your safety belt.  
Always adjust your seat so that you  
are as far back as possible but still  
able to operate the pedals and reach  
the steering wheel and controls  
comfortably.  
Inflated airbag (driver side)  
Inflation and deflation together take less than  
0.1 second.  
• Children 12 and under or shorter than  
55 inches (140 cm) should always  
travelintherearseatasthecarisfitted  
with a passenger airbag.  
When the system is triggered by impact of a  
frontal crash, the airbags in the steering  
wheelandpassengersideofthedashboard  
areinflated, afterwhichtheydeflatethrough  
vents in the back of the bags.  
Never fit a child seat in the front of the  
passenger airbag.  
The driver and passenger airbags are  
so-called smart airbags. This means that  
thesystemcompensatesforfactorssuchas  
the force of the collision.  
TheAIRBAGsystemcomprisesanairbagin  
thesteeringwheel, afrontpassengerairbag  
and side airbags in the front seats.  
The system supplements the protection  
provided by the safety belts to further  
enhance the safety of the occupants.  
If a fault is detected in the AIRBAG, the  
AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-  
ment panel will come on (see pages 56 and  
36).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
32  
Safety  
Always sit with the whole of your back  
incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,  
and with your seat as far back as is  
practical.Otherwiseyouwillbethrown  
back against the backrest when the  
airbag inflates which could cause you  
injury or death. The airbag needs  
room in which to inflate.  
• Fumes are generated by the chemical  
reaction that inflates the airbag.  
Because the dust/fumes can, in  
certain cases, cause irritation to the  
skin, the following measures should  
be taken:  
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-  
tion should be washed with clean  
water and a mild soap as soon as  
possible.  
In the event of eye irritation, flush the  
eyesthoroughlywithcleanwaterforat  
least 20 minutes.  
In case of persistent irritation, consult  
a doctor.  
Never attach anything to the steering  
wheel or passenger side of the instru-  
ment panel, as this could result in  
injury if the airbag should inflate. The  
same applies to anything you might  
haveinyourmouth, suchas apipe, for  
instance.  
Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both  
inflated  
Never rest your hands or forearms on  
the steering-wheel center padding.  
• Some components of the airbag will  
be warm for a short time. In some  
circumstances the airbag can cause  
minor burns or abrasions to the body  
when the airbag inflates/deflates.  
• If the AIR BAG warning light does not  
extinguish after the car has been  
started, or comes on or flashes while  
driving, have the car checked immedi-  
ately by an authorized Saab dealer.  
The warninglightcouldsignify that the  
airbags may not inflate in a crash, or  
they could even inflate without a  
crash. See page. 56.  
WARNING  
• Even if the car is equipped with  
AIRBAG, safety belts must still  
always be worn by all occupants.  
• To reduce the risk of head injuries in  
the event of a crash, the headliner and  
pillar trims incorporate energy absorb-  
ing material. These areas must not be  
modified in any way. Work on these  
areas must only be carried out at an  
authorized Saab dealer.  
• Note that because an airbag inflates  
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will  
not provide protection against a  
second impact occurring in the same  
incident. Always use your safety belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
33  
Moment of impact.  
3
5
4
5
2
6
7
6
The sensors detect  
deceleration and send  
a signal via the cen-  
tral sensor to the gas  
generator that inflates  
the airbag.  
7
1
2
AIRBAG system with belt pretensioners  
1 Central sensor  
2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)  
3 Steering wheel with integral airbag  
4 Passenger airbag  
The inflating airbag  
cushions the driver.  
5 Side-airbag sensor  
6 Side airbag  
7 Front sensors  
Accessories and other equipment must  
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as  
these are where the airbags inflate in the  
event of a crash.  
Airbag now fully  
inflated.  
The airbag starts to  
deflate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
Safety  
Front passenger seat  
Neverplaceanythingonthedashorin  
frontoftheseatas, in additiontobeing  
a hazard to passengers, this could  
interferewiththe function of the airbag  
in the event of a crash. The same  
appliestothemountingofaccessories  
on the dash.  
WARNING  
• DEATH or SERIOUS  
INJURY can occur.  
• Children12andunderor  
shorter than 55 inches  
(140 cm) can be killed by  
the airbag.  
WARNING  
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in  
the right front seat of a car equipped with  
apassengerairbag. Inflationof theairbag  
in the event of a crash could seriously  
injure or kill a child.  
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet  
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of  
the window.  
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace  
for children.  
• Do not carry anything in your lap.  
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in  
the front.  
The airbags are interconnected and have a  
common warning light. The passenger  
airbag moduleis housedinthefascia above  
the glove compartment and is marked ”SRS  
AIRBAG”. (SRS =Supplementary Restraint  
System).  
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a  
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal  
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-  
pied.  
• Sit as far back as possible from the  
airbag.  
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and  
CHILD RESTRAINTS.  
Never allow a child to stand in front of  
the seat or to sit on the lap of a  
front-seatpassenger.Seriousinjuryor  
death could result if the airbag is  
inflated in a crash.  
• The glove compartment must be  
closed while travelling. An open glove  
compartment door could cause leg  
injuries in the event of a crash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
35  
The side airbags, which help protect the  
upper body are integrated in the outside  
edges of the front seat backrests.  
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side  
will be activated, and only then if certain  
predetermined conditions are met such as  
the force and angle of the impact, the speed  
of the car on impact, and at which point on  
the car’s side the impact occurs.  
The sensors, which are fitted in the front  
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by  
the door panel being pressed in during an  
impactcondition. Thesideairbagtriggerwill  
be commanded based on the characteris-  
tics of this pressure rise.  
Side airbags  
• Improvement of the anticorrosion  
treatment of the doors should only be  
carried out by an authorized Saab  
dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that  
the side impact sensor and the mois-  
ture barrier in the front door could be  
damaged.  
WARNING  
• The side airbags will inflate only in the  
event of a side impact; not in the event  
of a front or rear-end crash or of the  
car’s rolling over.  
• This car is equipped with side airbags  
and no extra interior trim should be  
fitted. Failure to observe this warning  
could result in the side airbags not  
inflating as intended and thus not  
providing the intended protection  
either.  
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or  
the seat seam, in the area of the side  
airbag must immediately be repaired  
by an authorized Saab dealer.  
• Neverplaceanyobject in thearea that  
would be occupied by the inflated  
airbag.  
• Do not modify the speaker installation  
in the front doors or install speakers  
other than those specifically approved  
by Saab.  
• For optimum protection, sit upright in  
the seat, withyour safetybelt correctly  
fastened.  
• The sensors for the side airbags are  
fitted in the front doors. We advise  
against doing any work on the doors  
thatcouldaffectthemoisturebarrierin  
the door or the airbag sensors. It is  
essential that the moisture barrier  
(thick plastic film) in the front door is  
not damaged in any way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
36  
Safety  
AIR BAG warning light  
WARNING  
• If the airbag readiness light stays on  
after you start your vehicle, it means  
the airbagsystem may not be working  
properly. See page. 56. The airbags  
in your vehicle may not inflate in a  
crash, or they could even inflate with-  
out a crash.  
• To help avoid injury to yourself or  
others, have your vehicle serviced  
right away if theair bag readiness light  
stays on after you start your vehicle.  
Side airbag inflated  
Side airbag components  
1 Side airbag  
2 Sensor  
3 Moisture barrier  
4 Text on seat  
AIRBAG servicing  
The AIRBAG must be inspected as part of  
the normal service program but otherwise  
may be regarded as maintenance-free.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety  
37  
How do I position the seat to leave room for  
the airbag to inflate?  
Scrapping or working on airbags  
and belt pretensioners  
Frequently asked questions on func-  
tion of airbags  
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if  
airbags are fitted?  
Don’t have your seat too far forward.  
Recline the seat back to increase the  
distance between you and the airbag. For  
short drivers, special accessory pedal  
extensions are available through your Saab  
dealer.  
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with  
great force – to be fast enough to protect an  
adult in the seat.  
WARNING  
Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-  
ments the car’s normal safety system.  
Moreover, theairbagwillonlybeactuatedin  
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal  
crash, which means, of course, that it  
provides no protection in minor frontal  
crashes, major rear-end or side-on crashes  
or if the car rolls over.  
The safety belts help reduce the chance of  
thecaroccupantsfrombeingthrownaround  
and injured or killed inside the car.  
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs  
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag  
will make the optimum contact with the  
occupant, i.e. squareonfromthefront. If the  
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-  
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.  
• Under no circumstances should any  
modifications be made that affect the  
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-  
cal circuitry.  
• Before starting any welding work on  
the car, always disconnect the nega-  
tive (–) battery lead and cover the  
conductor.  
When do the front airbags inflate?  
Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain  
predetermined conditions in a moderate to  
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,  
depending on such factors as the force and  
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on  
impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof  
the impacting object.  
The airbag canonly beactivatedonce in the  
same incident.  
Do not attempt to drive the car after an  
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-  
ble.  
• Airbags and belt pretensioners must  
be deployed under controlled condi-  
tions before the car is scrapped or any  
of the system’s components are  
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-  
ers that have been deployed as a  
result of a crash must be replaced by  
new ones.  
In addition, airbags provide no protection  
against a secondary impact occurring in the  
same incident. So there is no doubt about  
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all  
times.  
• Airbag-system components must  
neverbetransferredforuseinanother  
vehicle.  
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs  
room to inflate.  
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-  
fully in order to protect an adult person,  
before they are thrown forward, in a serious  
frontal crash.  
• All work involving the scrapping or  
replacement of airbags or belt preten-  
sioners must only be carried out by  
knowledgeable personnel.  
• The headlining and roof pillar trim  
mustnotbemodifiedinanyway. Work  
on these areas must only be carried  
out at a Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Safety  
What won’t trigger the front airbags?  
Arethesmokeandfumesgivenoffwhenthe  
airbag operates at all harmful?  
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning  
light comes on?  
The airbag will not be activated in all  
front-end crashes. For instance, if the car  
hashitsomethingrelativelysoftandyielding  
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid  
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will  
not necessarily be triggered.  
Most people who have remained in a car  
with little or no ventilation for several  
minutes complained only of minor irritation  
of the throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possi-  
blegettingdustonyourskinasthereisarisk  
of skin irritation.  
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may  
bring on an attack, in which case you should  
follow the normal procedure advised by  
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a  
doctor afterwards.  
If the warning lightis on, it means that a fault  
has been detected in the system. The  
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as  
intended and it might even be activated  
erroneously. You should therefore take the  
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as  
possible.  
How loud is the inflation?  
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,  
but it is very short-lived and will not damage  
your hearing. For a short time afterwards  
you could experience a buzzing noise in  
your ears.  
Most people who have experienced it  
cannot remember the noise of the inflation  
at all – all they remember is the noise of the  
crash.  
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a  
passenger airbag is installed?  
Definitely not!  
Children 12 and under or shorter than  
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the  
airbag.  
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for  
children.  
NEVER put a child seat in the front.  
Sit as far back as possible from the air bag.  
Always use safety belts and child restraints.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security  
39  
Security  
Doors _________________ 40  
Central locking _________ 40  
Car alarm ______________ 46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
Security  
Key / Remote control  
The key unit consists of a mechanical key  
with integrated remote control.  
The mechanical key is used for manual  
locking and unlocking.  
The remote control is used for remote lock-  
ing and unlocking.  
Doors  
1
2
Door handles  
Pull the handle to open the door.  
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the  
handle from above to secure a better grip.  
Central locking  
The key fits all the car’s locks.  
The key supplied with the car has a code  
number on a black plastic tag that needs to  
be quoted for ordering additional keys. You  
should therefore make a careful note of the  
number.  
The key contains a unique electronic code  
for your car. When the key is inserted in the  
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,  
the car can be started.  
WARNING  
3
Leaving children or pets unattended in a  
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-  
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the  
ignition key. A child or others could be  
badly injured or even killed.  
Key / Remote control  
1 To lock  
2 To unlock  
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)  
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportWagon)  
Your car is supplied with two keys. It is pos-  
sible to have up to four keys for a car at one  
time. If you loose one key you should have  
this replaced as soon as possible by con-  
tactingyourSaabdealer.Whenthenewkey  
is programmed into the system, the missing  
key is automatically erased.  
NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise  
you to take two keys with you on long jour-  
neys and to keep them separate. If all keys  
arelost, itwillbenecessarytoreplacecostly  
electronic components as well as the keys.  
This loss and replacement cost is not cov-  
ered by the new car warranty.  
If an additional key is to be added, all of the  
original keys must be brought to the dealer  
so that the control module can ”learn” to rec-  
ognize the new components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Security  
41  
Locking/unlocking the car  
When the car is locked and unlocked the  
theft alarm is also affected.  
NOTICE  
The key contains delicate electronics.  
• Do not expose it to water.  
• Avoid rough handling.  
Remote locking (1)  
Press  
once on the control: all doors  
locked.  
The hazard warning lights will flash once.  
The tailgate cannot be opened now from  
inside using the switch on the driver´s door.  
• Do not place the key where it may be  
subjected to high temperatures, e.g.  
on the instrument panel.  
• The key may malfunction if it becomes  
very cold. Warm it in your hands for a  
couple of minutes.  
Remote unlocking (2)  
Press  
once on the control: the driver´s  
Locking/unlocking by remote control.  
• Never open the key. For changing the  
battery, see page 43.  
door is unlocked. Press a second time to  
unlock the rest of the doors.  
1 To lock  
2 To unlock  
The hazard warning lights will flash twice.  
If remote unlocking should fail to work  
Unlock the driver’s door with the key. To  
silencethealarm, insert the key into theigni-  
tion switch and turn it to the ON position.  
To check the number of keys that are pro-  
grammed for the car; see page 50.  
Electronic starting interlock  
(immobilizer)  
Each time the key is removed from the igni-  
tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-  
vated and the car is thus immobilized, see  
also page 47.  
The car can now be started. Contact your  
local Saab dealer to have the system  
checked and rectified.  
Reprogramming lock system  
functions  
Certain lock system functions can be repro-  
grammed by your authorized Saab dealer;  
see page 282.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
42  
Security  
WARNING  
Theremotecontrolalsoworksfrominside  
the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a  
way that the buttons are not unintention-  
ally pressed when the key is turned, or  
inserted or removed from the ignition  
switch.  
1
2
Otherwise, the doors may be unintention-  
ally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On  
Sedan models, the trunk may even be  
opened.  
Locking/unlocking by key  
1 To lock  
Switch for operation of central locking  
The central locking can also be operated  
2 To unlock  
Locking by key (1)  
When the car is locked and unlocked the  
theft alarm is also affected.  
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.  
Thetrunk lid/tailgatecannotbeopened now  
from inside using the switch on the driver’s  
door.  
from inside the car by means of the  
switch on the center console.  
To lock all doors: press the symbol side of  
the switch once.  
To unlock the driver´s door: press the  
switch once.  
To unlock all doors: press the switch  
twice.  
This switch is inoperative when the car is  
locked from the outside using the remote  
control.  
Unlocking by key (2)  
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the  
driver´s door will unlock.  
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all  
doors, but not trunk lid/tailgate, unlocked.  
The interior locking buttons on each door  
affect only the respective door.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security  
43  
If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-  
rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the  
doorswillbeswitchedoffautomaticallyafter  
20 minutes, to prevent a flat battery. In such  
casestheelectricallyoperatedseatswillnot  
function.  
Changing the key battery  
When the battery voltage in the key falls  
below a predetermined level the Saab Infor-  
mation Display (SID) will issue the following  
message: ”Remote control battery low.  
Replace battery.”. Press the CLEAR button  
on the SID to acknowledge this message.  
You must then replace the battery without  
delay to avoid malfunctions. The life of the  
battery is normally 4 years.Contact a Saab  
dealer to have the battery replaced.  
WARNING  
Having the doors locked when you are  
driving will reduce the likelihood of:  
• Passengers, especially children,  
opening doors and falling out of the  
car.  
Child safety lock on rear doors  
• Intruders entering the car when it is  
moving slowly or at a standstill.  
Child safety locks  
• Injury resulting from a door bursting  
open in the event of a crash.  
The rear doors are equipped with child  
safety locks that are operated by means of  
a catch adjacent to the door lock.  
However, you must also remember that  
locked doors can hamper rescuers in the  
event of a crash.  
Insertakeyandturnthecatch45° clockwise  
or counterclockwise as indicated by the  
label on the door.  
When the child safety catch is in the locked  
position, the door cannot be opened from  
the inside.  
WARNING  
If small children are carried in the rear  
seat, the safety locks on rear doors  
should be activated to prevent uninten-  
tional opening from the inside.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
44  
Security  
Unlocking  
The trunk lid is unlocked using:  
• The  
button on the key  
• The trunk lid switch on the inside of the  
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at  
a standstill)  
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-  
tion indicators flashing three times.  
The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is  
inoperative when the car is locked.  
Locking  
The trunk lid release is locked automatically  
when closed.  
Trunk lid switch  
Trunk Release Handle  
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan  
Trunk Release Handle  
The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-  
tral-locking system. The trunk lid release  
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative  
when the car is locked from the outside or  
moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph  
(4 km/h).  
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release  
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.  
This handle will glow following exposure to  
light. Pull the release handle down to open  
the trunk from the inside.  
NOTICE  
The trunk release handle was not  
designed to be used to tie down the trunk  
lid or as a an anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk. Improper use of the  
trunk release could damage it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security  
45  
Locking  
The tailgate is locked using:  
Tailgate, 9-5 SportWagon  
The tailgate is not unlocked when the other  
car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button  
on the driver’s door is inoperative when the  
car is locked or moving at a speed greater  
than 2.7 mph (4 km/h).  
• The  
• The  
button on the key  
button on the centre console  
Unlocking  
• The key in the driver’s door.  
The tailgate is unlocked using:  
• When vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph  
(4 km/h).  
• The  
button on the key  
• The tailgate switch on the inside of the  
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at  
a standstill)  
Grab handle  
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-  
tion indicators flashing three times.  
NOTICE  
Use the grab handle to close the tailgate.  
Avoid the following, due to the risk of lock  
mechanism damage when the tailgate is  
closed.  
• Never grasp the lock mechanism as  
this can lock the mechanism.  
• Never close the lock mechanism man-  
ually.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Security  
If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has  
been left open when the car is locked, the  
LED on the fascia will flash (three times per  
second) for ten seconds to indicate this.  
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus  
trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed prop-  
erly.  
If the fault persists (LED flashing when  
renewed attempt made to activate the car  
alarm by remote control), lock the car using  
the key instead. The car alarm will not have  
been activated and you should get in touch  
with an authorized Saab dealer.  
To avoid inconvenience caused by the  
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make  
sure that anyone else using the car is famil-  
iar with how both the car alarm and the lock-  
ing system work.  
Car alarm  
1
2
WARNING  
Leaving children or pets unattended in a  
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-  
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the  
ignition key. A child or others could be  
badly injured or even killed.  
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-  
vated/deactivated when the car is  
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by  
the key, see page 41.  
The antenna for the alarm system is located  
in the center console.  
3
Remote control  
1 Activate/lock  
2 Deactivate/unlock  
3 Unlock trunk/tailgate  
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportWagon)  
All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood  
are monitored by microswitches.  
If the alarm is tripped (the direction indica-  
tors are flashingandthe hornis on) it can be  
turned off by unlocking the car using the  
Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Elec-  
tronic starting interlock (immobilizer), see  
page 47 for details.  
button.  
Thecaralarmisarmed10 secondsafterthe  
car has been locked by the remote control.  
During this ten-second delay period, the  
doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still  
be opened without the alarm being trig-  
gered.  
The LED indicator on the instrument panel  
fascia will be on continuously during this  
period, attheendofwhichitwillstart toflash  
(once every other second).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security  
47  
Activating the car alarm  
Electronic starting interlock  
(immobilizer)  
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a  
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is  
verified, the engine can be started.  
Each time the key is removed from the igni-  
tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated.  
This means that the car cannot be started  
without the correct key inserted in the igni-  
tion and the immobilizer thus deactivated.  
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)  
”Key not accepted. Contact service.” will  
appear on the Saab Information Display  
(SID).  
Alarm signals  
The car alarm cannot be activated if the  
driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch  
is in ON position.  
When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-  
gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is  
opened.  
If, on the other hand, one of the other doors  
or the trunk or hood is open or opened and  
not closed again during the 10-seconds  
delay period, it will be excluded from the  
alarm function.  
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten  
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or  
hood) will once again be secured by the  
alarm system.  
As usual, the LED will be on continuously  
during the new delay period and will start to  
flash once every other second after the  
10-seconds period has elapsed.  
Thealarmwillalsobetriggeredifanattempt  
is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-  
tion switch, or to disconnect the battery.  
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm  
signals will be set off:  
• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five  
minutes.  
• Horn wailing for 30 seconds.  
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is  
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm  
period.  
In this case, you can still start the car if you  
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of  
the buttons on the key (providing that the  
receiver gets the right signal from the key).  
Takethe cartoanauthorizedSaabdealer to  
have the system checked.  
The LED double-flashes when the car is  
immobilized.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
48  
Security  
Panic-function  
In the car alarm system is a function called  
"Panic-function".  
To activate panic function:  
• Push and hold one of the buttons on the  
key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting  
inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on  
the center console for 2 seconds.  
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard  
warning lights and horn).  
To deactivate panic function:  
• Push one of the buttons on the key, push  
the LOCK-switch in the center console,  
turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the  
ignition to ON.  
Whenthepanic-functionis activated the car  
will be locked/unlocked depending upon  
which button was pushed.  
When the ignition is ON the panic-function  
cannot be activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security  
49  
Overview of functions  
Battery for key The battery for the key will normally have a life of  
4 years. When the battery needs changing,  
”Remote control battery low. Replace battery.”  
will appear on the Saab Information Display  
(SID).  
Locking/  
activation  
Hazard warning lights flash once.  
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.  
Unlocking/  
deactivation  
Hazard warning lights flash twice.  
The LED will come on for two seconds.  
Contact an authorized Saab dealer.  
Unlocking/  
Hazard warning lights flash three times.  
Car-battery  
voltage  
If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is  
active (car is locked), for example during an  
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be trig-  
gered.  
deactivation of The LED will flash three times per second for 10  
trunklid/tailgate seconds.  
alarm  
Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.  
Horn wails for 30 seconds.  
Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different coun-  
tries.  
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-  
sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 282).  
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in  
the normal way (unlocking).  
Key  
The range of the key is normally 5–10 yds. (5–  
10 metres),althoughitcanbesubstantiallymore  
than this in ideal conditions (range can vary  
greatly depending on the position of the car and  
its surroundings).  
If the key is not working, it may be because the  
code signal has not been synchronized with that  
in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify  
this, press the unlock button on the key at least  
four times in quick succession. When it is recog-  
nized, the door locks will cycle.  
If a key is lost, the new one will have to be pro-  
grammed(allkeysmustbepresent)tomatchthe  
car’s unique security code. Contact an author-  
ized Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
Security  
Overview of LED signals and SID messages  
Status LED signal  
Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.  
SID message  
Reason/action  
Theft protection failure.  
Contact service.  
Probably a fault in one of thesensors  
or the horn.  
Have the car checked by an autho-  
rized Saab dealer.  
Alarm activated (after delay).  
Flashes once every other  
second.  
Deactivation.  
Comes on for 2 seconds.  
Off.  
Key not accepted.  
Contact service.  
Fault in key transmitter or in igni-  
tion-switch receiver.  
Turn ignition switch to ON and press  
the unlock button on the key. Start  
the engine.  
Alarm not activated.  
Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open Flashes three times per sec-  
or opened during delay period.  
ond for 10 seconds.  
Have the car checked by an autho-  
rized Saab dealer.  
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate.  
Flashesthree timesper sec-  
ond for 10 seconds.  
Remote control battery  
low. Replace battery.  
Fit a new battery in the key, see page  
43.  
Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or Comes on for 10 seconds.  
hood after delay period.  
• REMOTE KEY  
• TRANSPONDR  
Turn the ignition key to position ON  
and then press the button for open-  
ing the trunk lid. Saab Information  
Display (SID) displays the number of  
keysandtransmitters(transponders)  
coded to the car.  
Car immobilized but not locked.  
Car alarm not activated.  
Flashes twice at three sec-  
onds intervals.  
Fault in a switch serving doors, hood Flashing (instead of being  
or trunk lid.  
on continuously) during  
delay period.  
Some signals may differ between model variants for different  
countries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security  
51  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not  
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-  
ation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-  
facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.  
Canada only:  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-  
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may  
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-  
ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion of the device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Security  
(This page has been left blank)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
53  
Instruments and  
controls  
PUSH  
PULL  
VOL  
ON  
BAL  
1
4
2
5
3
6
Indicator and warning  
lights _______________  
54  
…F  
…C  
ECON OFF  
Instruments ___________  
60  
DOLBY  
B
NR  
BAS TRE  
FAD  
Saab Information Display  
(SID) ________________  
63  
69  
AS  
SEARCH  
Switches _____________  
ON OFF  
Automatic climate control  
(ACC) _______________  
75  
CLEAR SET  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning  
lights  
A numberof indicatorandwarninglights will  
come on when the ignition is switched on  
prior to starting. Under normal conditions,  
these should go out a few seconds after the  
engine has started (see page 60).  
Warning, oil pressure  
(engine oil)  
This light will come on together with  
if  
the engine oil pressure is dangerously low.  
Ifthelightflashes orcomes on whileyouare  
driving, stop the car, switch off the engine  
and check the engine oil level (see page  
204).  
NOTICE  
6 Fuel gauge  
Main instrument panel  
7 Engine temperature gauge  
8 Trip meter reset button  
9 Odometer and trip meter  
1 Tachometer  
Under no circumstances must the car be  
driven when this warning light is on. Low  
oil pressure can result in serious engine  
damage.  
2 Indicator and warning lights  
3 Speedometer  
4 Indicator and warning lights  
5 Pressure gauge  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instruments and controls  
55  
Parking brake warning  
light  
Warning, charging  
Brake warning light  
This light will show when the parking brake  
is on (see page 196).  
If the car is drivenwith the parking brake still  
This light will come on together with  
if  
This light will come on together with  
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-  
voir (see pages 208).  
If the ABS warning light is on at the same  
time, the ABS system may be inoperative  
because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake  
warning”, page 56).  
if  
the battery is discharging. If it comes on  
while you are driving, stop the car as soon  
as possible and switch off the engine.  
on,  
sound.  
will also come on and a chime will  
Check the alternator drive belt (see page  
212). If the belt has broken, the engine may  
overheat (cooling system will not function  
properly), the battery will not be charged,  
the A/C compressor will not run and power  
assistance for the steering will be lost.  
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-  
ates on the rear wheels.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Never drive the car when these warning  
lights are on. Danger of brake failure!  
Always apply the parking brake when  
parking, see page 196.  
Have the brake system checked at once  
by an authorized Saab dealer.  
Always apply the parking brake  
before removing the ignition key.  
• Do not apply the parking brake while  
the car is moving.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Instruments and controls  
If the level is normal, depress the brake  
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check  
thelevelagain. Ifthelevelisstillnormal, you  
may drive the car, with considerable cau-  
tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer  
to have the brake system checked.  
WARNING  
Anti-lock brake warning  
• If the airbag readiness light stays on  
after you start your vehicle, it means  
the airbag system may not be working  
properly. One or more of the following  
conditions may occur:  
This light will come on if a fault has occurred  
in the ABS system.  
On certain variants  
and  
as well  
WARNING  
as can light up to indicate a fault in the  
-Non-deploymentoftheairbagsinthe  
event of a crash.  
electronic brake force distribution system  
(distribution of the brake pressure between  
the front and rear wheels).  
• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a  
danger of the rear wheels locking up  
on hard braking.  
- Deployment of the airbags without a  
crash.  
Conventional braking without the ABS func-  
tion will still be available.  
For safety reasons, stop the car and check  
the level of the brake fluid (see page 208).  
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-  
voir is below the MIN mark, the car  
should be towed to an authorized  
Saab dealer.  
- Deployment of the airbags in  
crashes less severe than intended.  
• To help avoid injury to yourself or  
others, have your vehicle serviced  
right away if the airbag readiness light  
stays on after you start your vehicle.  
Airbag warning light  
The light will come on for about three sec-  
onds when the ignition switch is turned to  
the Start or Drive position. It should go out  
after the engine has started.  
This light together with  
will come on if  
a potentially serious fault has occurred in  
the airbag system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instruments and controls  
57  
This light indicates a malfunction in the  
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car  
may still be driven with care and with some-  
what diminished performance (see page  
151).  
Engine malfunction  
(CHECK ENGINE)  
CHECK message indicator  
This light indicates that there is a message  
in the Saab Information Display (SID). A  
chime will also sound  
WARNING  
NOTICE  
(see page 67).  
An illuminated ”Engine malfunction  
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-  
cates an engine-related problem. While  
your car may be able to be driven with the  
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”  
indicator light illuminated (Limp-home  
mode), you are advised to have your car  
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as  
soon as possible.  
The car should be checked immediately  
at an authorized Saab dealer to prevent  
more serious faults from arising.  
Central warning light  
This light will come on and a chime will  
sound if a fault has been detected in any  
system that is critical to safety. Any of the  
following can activate the central warning  
light and alarm:  
Indicator, fuel  
This light comes on when there is less than  
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the  
tank.  
Continued driving without this problem  
being corrected might cause serious  
further damage to your car and create  
unsafe driving conditions. The operator  
should be prepared to take action if such  
unsafe conditions arise (e.g.brake  
• Airbag system.  
• Low oil pressure in engine.  
• Parking brake is on (when car is moving).  
• Brake fluid level low.  
NOTICE  
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-  
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.).  
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn  
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause  
the catalytic converter to be damaged by  
overheating.  
• Fault detected in ABS system.  
• Electronic brake force distribution (distri-  
bution of brake pressure between front  
and rear wheels).  
• Engine overheating.  
• Alternator not charging properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
58  
Instruments and controls  
Xenon headlight fault  
indicator  
(certain variants only)  
Indicator, SPORT-mode  
automatic transmission  
Indicator, cruise control  
This light shows when the cruise-control  
system is active (see page 167).  
This light indicates that there is a fault in the  
Xenon headlight system, which consists of  
xenonheadlightsandanautomaticlevelling  
system.  
This lightwillcomeonincarswithautomatic  
transmission when the S (SPORT) button  
on the selector lever has been pressed  
(position N or D) see page 166.  
If a fault arises in the Xenon headlight sys-  
tem, the headlights will be angled down to  
avoid dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.  
Adjust your speed accordingly as visibility  
will be reduced.  
In this mode, the gear changes occur later,  
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and  
transmission a sportier feel.  
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S  
button on the selector lever again. The  
mode is also deselected automatically  
when the selector lever is moved to P, R, M  
or L.  
Indicator, high beam  
This light shows when the headlights are on  
high beam (see page 69).  
NOTICE  
IftheXenonheadlightfaultindicatorlights  
up, have your car checked as soon as  
possible at an authorized Saab dealer.  
Indicator, rear fog light  
This light shows when the rear foglight is on  
(see page 70).  
The rear fog light is switched off automat-  
ically whentheengineis switchedoff. When  
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be  
switched on manually again.  
Indicator, WINTER-mode  
automatic transmission  
Ifyoudonotrectifytheproblem,nighttime  
visibility willbepoorsincetherangeof the  
headlights is reduced.  
This light shows when the WINTER mode  
has been selected in cars with automatic  
transmission (see page 166).  
In the WINTER mode, the car pulls away in  
3rd gear, to help prevent wheelspin on an  
icy road.  
The rear fog light consists of one light so it  
should not be mistaken for brake lights.  
Indicator, open door  
To cancel the WINTER mode, press the W  
button.  
If a door has not been closed properly, the  
pictogram will indicate the door concerned  
(or tailgate).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
59  
Automatic transmission,  
fault indicator  
Indicator TCS/ESP OFF  
Indicator TCS/ESP  
On a car with an automatic transmission,  
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault  
has been detected in the transmission.  
Switch the ignition off and on again to check  
if the fault persists.  
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in  
most cases to drive the car (see page 161).  
Have the automatic transmission checked  
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as  
possible.  
The indicator light goes on when the Elec-  
tronic Stability Program/Traction Control  
System is switched off with the TCS/ESP-  
button.  
IMPORTANT: the system is automatically  
engaged every time the engine is started  
(see page 171).  
The indicator light also goes on when there  
is a fault in the system. In this case the light  
cannot be turned off by means of the  
TCS/ESPbutton. If a fault is indicated, have  
the system checked by an authorized Saab  
dealer.  
See also ”Traction Control System (TCS)”,  
on page 171 and “Electronic Stability Pro-  
gram (ESP) on page 172.  
TheTCS/ESPindicatorlightislocatedinthe  
tachometer and will be illuminated when  
TCS/ESP regulation is occurring, i.e. when  
there is insufficient traction between the  
tiresand the roadsurfaceto providethe grip  
required for the acceleration called for. The  
driver can also sense that the engine is not  
responding normally to the accelerator.  
Operation of the TCS/ESP indicates  
reduced traction between the tires and the  
road, and that extra careshould be taken by  
the driver.  
In normal driving, the TCS/ESP will help to  
improve both ride comfort and safety, but  
must not be regarded as a system to enable  
the driver to drive at or maintain a higher  
rate of speed. The same precautions for  
safecorneringanddrivingonslipperyroads  
must still be applied (see page 171).  
NOTICE  
If the control module has actuated the  
Limp-home function for the automatic  
transmission, the car will remain in 5th  
gear when D is selected, making it very  
sluggish. To overcome this, select posi-  
tionLtopreventunnecessarywearonthe  
transmission. The transmission then  
startsin2ndgear. Whenthecarismoving  
you can select position D.  
When the indicator light is on, the car  
must not be driven with a trailer attached.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60  
Instruments and controls  
1 Cars with automatic transmission  
Odometer and trip meter  
Instruments  
Theodometerrecordsthedistancetraveled  
in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian  
vehicles the distance indicated is in kilome-  
tres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths  
(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on  
Canadian vehicles).  
Tachometer  
Autochecking of lights,  
main instrument panel  
The tachometer indicates the engine speed  
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The  
needle may be allowed to enter the broken  
red zone on the dial only for an instant.  
A safety cut-out function (in thefuelsystem)  
prevents the engine speed from exceeding  
approximately 6,000 rpm.  
The above warning and indicator lights  
should come on when the ignition is  
switchedonpriortostarting. Theyshouldgo  
out after about 3 seconds.  
The following lights light up until the engine  
is started, presuming that no fault exists:  
Reset button  
The reset button has two functions, deter-  
mined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.  
• When the ignition is ON, pressing the  
button will reset the trip meter.  
• Central warning light  
.
• When the ignition is OFF, the display  
lights up for 20 seconds enabling you to  
read the odometer and trip meter. Press-  
ing the button a second time within these  
20 seconds will reset the trip meter.  
• Oil pressure warning light  
.
• Warning, charging  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Instruments and controls  
61  
60  
100  
50  
80  
70  
40  
60  
120  
80  
30  
140  
40  
90  
20  
10  
160  
100  
110  
120  
130  
20  
180  
200  
220  
240  
260  
140  
150  
160  
Speedometer  
(U.S. speedometer shown)  
Fuel gauge  
Temperature gauge  
Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters).  
The temperature gauge shows the temper-  
ature of the coolant. The needle should be  
in the middle of the scale when the engine  
is at normal operating temperature.  
Thefuelgaugeshowstheamountoffuelleft  
in the tank. When this is down to about  
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the  
main instrument panel will come on (see  
page 57).  
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to  
check the approximate distance that can be  
traveled on the remaining fuel  
(see page 63).  
The speedometer receives signals from the  
wheel sensors in the ABS system.  
If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been  
selected, the scale will be illuminated up to  
87 mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the  
scale will be illuminated if the speed of the  
car exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).  
If the needle approaches the red zone,  
whichcanoccurinveryhotweatherorwhen  
theengineisunderaheavyload,driveinthe  
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs  
low and avoid shifting down.  
If the needle enters the red zone, the  
warning light will come on and an alarm  
chime will sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
Instruments and controls  
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone  
and the engine at the same time loses  
power, because the monitoring system is  
holding the charging pressure down, you  
should contact an authorized Saab dealer.  
If the speed exceeds 149 mph/240 km/h  
(155 mph/250 km/h, 9-5 Aero) the increase  
inspeedwillbelimitedbytheloweringofthe  
boost pressure. The pressure gauge then  
moves towards the middle of the orange  
zone, indicating reduced engine output and  
thus reduces the speed of the car as well.  
NOTICE  
If the needle, despite the above action,  
enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-  
ately, let the engine idle.  
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop  
the engine.  
Check fuse 1 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel  
under the hood, see page 231.  
Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,  
stopthecar assoonas itis safetodosoand  
check the coolant level by looking at the  
level visible through the plastic tank – do not  
remove the cap.  
If the coolant level falls below theMIN mark,  
the Saab Information Display (SID) will dis-  
play the message ”Coolant level low.  
Refill.”.  
Pressure gauge  
Theturbogaugeindicatestheair volumefor  
combustion, which is equivalent to the  
engine load.  
At low loads, the needle will move within the  
white zone. At higher loads and during  
heavyacceleration, theneedlewillenter the  
yellow area. At very high loads or under cer-  
tain barometric conditions, the needle may  
enter the first part of the red zone without  
indicating that there is a fault.  
WARNING  
Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank  
completely when the engine is hot, open  
with care. The pressure in the cool-  
ing-system can cause hot coolant and  
steam to be released. Failure to heed this  
warning may result in personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
63  
Saab Information  
Display (SID)  
SET  
NIGHT PANEL  
CLEAR  
WARNING  
It is strongly recommended that the SID  
settings be changed only when the car is  
stationary. The driver’s attention can  
otherwise easily be distracted from the  
road.  
Trip computer  
Selecting the function  
Use the  
button to scroll through the  
following functions:  
The Saab Information Display (SID) shows  
CHECK messages and incorporates eight  
trip-computer functions.  
Dist  
Distance to destination / Trip  
meter.  
Selector lever indication  
(Automatic transmission)  
The SID is also used by the Audio System.  
Arriv  
Estimated time of arrival.  
Alarm function.  
The position of the selector lever is indi-  
cated on the main instrument panel. If  
manual mode is selected, the current gear  
is also displayed.  
Alarm  
SpeedW Speed warning (chime).  
Use the  
button to scroll through the  
following functions:  
Date  
Date, month and year  
Temp.  
D.T.E.  
Outdoor temperature and Date.  
Estimated range (distance to  
empty fuel tank).  
Fuel ∅  
Average fuel consumption  
since function last reset.  
Speed Average speed since function  
last reset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
64  
Instruments and controls  
Outdoor temperature  
Entering values for the functions  
Values can be entered for the following  
functions: Speed , Dist, Arriv, Alarm and  
Speed W.  
Setting the date  
(Frost warning)  
1 Use  
to select Date.  
Regardless of which function has been  
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will  
automatically display the outdoor tempera-  
ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (–3°  
and +3°C). This also applies if the  
temperature has moved outside the range  
of 21° to 43°F (–6° to +6°C) but is again  
between 26° and 38°F (–3° and +3°C).  
2 Press the SET button for at least one  
second (year starts to flash and a chime  
sounds).  
1 Select the desired function using  
or  
.
3 Set the year using  
4 Touch SET.  
5 Set the month in the same way.  
6 Touch SET.  
7 Set the day in the same way.  
8 Press SET to save the date setting.  
or  
.
2 Press the SET button for at least one  
second (figures start to flash and a  
chime sounds).  
3 Use  
or  
to increase or  
decrease the value (press CLEAR to  
reset).  
WARNING  
4 Press SET to record the value.  
Remember that roads can be icy even at  
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),  
especially on bridges and stretches of  
road that are sheltered from the sun.  
Average fuel consumption  
The average fuel consumption is calculated  
using the values for fuel consumed and dis-  
tance driven since last reset. This value is  
stored in the car’s trip computer even when  
the engine is switched off.  
• Select Fuel Ø with  
.
To reset the value, press the CLEAR button  
for 4 seconds. A chime will be heard and  
CLEARED will be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instruments and controls  
65  
Turning the Alarm and Speed  
warning on or off  
1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning  
function.  
2 Press SET to turn on the function.  
Press CLEAR to turn off the function.  
Calculation of arrival time and  
average speed  
The settings must be made before the jour-  
ney is started.  
Using Dist as a trip meter  
Ifnovaluehas beensetfortheDistfunction,  
Dist will now function as a trip meter (indi-  
cated by an arrow on the far right of the dis-  
play).  
Press CLEAR to reset the trip meter.  
Calculation of arrival time:  
Under 1000 miles the distance will be  
shown in increments of 0.1 miles,  
there-after, the reading will change in incre-  
ments of 1.0 mile.  
Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the  
distance will be shown in increments of  
10 meters, there-after, the reading will  
change in increments of 100 meters.  
When either function is on, Alarm/Speed W  
respectivelywill be visible on thedisplay. An  
asterisk * will be visible on the right of the  
display when either function is selected.  
The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will  
not be cancelled when the engine is  
switched off.  
When the Alarm has been set to come on at  
a specified time, it will only be activated  
once – it will not come on at the same time  
every day. Press SET to turn it on again.  
The Alarm will continue to beep for one  
minute if not switched off.  
1 Select Dist using the  
2 Set the destination distance.  
3 Press SET.  
button.  
When Arriv. is selected during the journey,  
thearrivaltimebasedonthe averagespeed  
over the past 20 minutes will be displayed.  
The trip computer will include any stops in  
the calculation of the estimated time of  
arrival.  
PressDistandthedistanceremainingtothe  
destination will be displayed in the same  
way.  
After the distance to destination has  
decreased to zero, the Dist will function as  
a trip meter (see ”Using Dist as a trip  
meter”). The starting value for the trip meter  
will be the last distance set in the Dist  
function.  
When Dist is functioning as a trip meter, the  
Arriv function will display the current time.  
Example: The Dist setting was 100 miles.  
Once 100 miles (160 km) has been cov-  
ered, the Dist will start to function as a trip  
meter, the initial reading of which will be  
100 miles (160 km).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
66  
Instruments and controls  
Tocalculate the arrivaltimeif aspecified  
average speed is maintained  
Calculating therequisiteaverage speed:  
1 Press to select Dist.  
2 Set the distance to be covered.  
3 Press to select Arriv.  
Resetting values  
To reset the values, press CLEAR for at  
least four seconds.  
The following functions will be reset  
simultaneously:  
1 Select Dist using the  
2 Set the distance to be covered.  
3 Press to select Speed Ø.  
button.  
4 Set the desired arrival time.  
• Estimated range on remaining fuel  
(function based on a fuel consumption of  
28 mpg).  
• Average fuel consumption.  
• Average speed.  
• Arrival time (function based on current  
speed).  
Programmed values for Dist, Alarm and  
Speed W will not be reset (see the respec-  
tive function).  
4 Set the average speed you intend to  
drive.  
5 Press SET to display the estimated  
arrival time.  
At the beginning of a journey, the Speed Ø  
and Arriv functions will display current val-  
ues. If values are set during the journey, the  
new values will be displayed after a delay of  
about 10 seconds.  
5 Press SET to display the average speed  
you need to maintain to arrive at the  
desired time.  
At the beginning of a journey, the Speed Ø  
and Arriv functions will display current val-  
ues. If values are set during the journey, the  
new values will be displayed after a delay of  
about 10 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
67  
The following messages may be displayed:  
CHECK messages  
Night panel  
Whentheengineis started, CHECKING will  
appear on the display for about four sec-  
onds, while the SID checks are being per-  
formed.  
When a CHECK message is generated  
while the car is being driven, a chime will  
sound, INFO DISPL will illuminate on the  
main instrument panel, and the message  
will appear on the SID. The number of mes-  
sages that can be displayed by the SID  
varies with the specification of the car.  
If more than one CHECK message has  
beengenerated, the +symbolwill appear to  
the left of the text on the display. The mes-  
sages appear in order of priority.  
If a new fault occurs while another message  
is being displayed, the message relating to  
the new one will appear for 10 seconds,  
after which the display will return to the ear-  
lier one.  
To improve night-driving conditions inside  
the car, the Night Panel mode can be  
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-  
mation displayed is reduced, and only the  
most important instruments and displays  
will be illuminated.  
When the Night Panel button is pressed,  
only thespeedometerwillbeilluminated(up  
to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all  
the other instruments illumination being  
extinguished and their needles moved to  
zero.BoththeSIDandtheACCdisplayswill  
be extinguished and the backlighting for  
switches and other controls will be dimmed.  
Note: All indicator and warning lights,  
together with the display of CHECK mes-  
sages, will operate as normal, except ”Out-  
door temperature (Frost warning)”, see  
page 64.  
Message  
See  
page  
Fog light failure.  
216  
220  
220  
214  
207  
43  
Rear light failure.  
Brake light failure.  
Washer fluid level low. Refill.  
Coolant level low. Refill.  
Remote control battery low.  
Replace battery.  
Key not accepted. Contact service.  
50  
50  
Theft protection failure. Contact  
service.  
Gearbox too hot. Make a safe stop. 162  
Tighten fuel filler cap.  
154  
264  
Press CLEAR once to acknowledge a mes-  
sage, whereupon it will be cleared from the  
display. It will not be displayed again before  
the ignition has been switched off and then  
on again.  
1)  
Time for service.  
1 Thismessagewillbedisplayedapproximately  
600 miles (1,000 km) before the next sched-  
uled service is due, or when 365 days have  
elapsed since the last service. The message  
should be cleared at the time of that service  
(see the Saab Warranties & Service Record  
Booklet).  
This message can also be deleted by first  
briefly pressing the CLEAR button, then  
depressing it a second time for at least eight  
seconds until ”SERVICE” appears on the dis-  
play and a chime sounds. The message can  
only be deleted when it is shown on the SID.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
68  
Instruments and controls  
The following conditions will wake up the  
respective displays in the Night-Panel  
mode:  
Units and language versions  
The SID has four sets of units:  
METRIC IMP. 1  
IMP. 2 US  
• Setting of the Audio system, SID or ACC  
(display comes on for ten seconds).  
• CHECK message generated in the SID.  
• High engine revs cause the rev counter to  
be illuminated until the engine speed has  
fallen again.  
km  
miles  
mph  
UK gal  
°F  
miles  
mph  
miles  
mph  
km/h  
liters  
°C  
UK gal US gal  
°C °F  
• Ifthequantity of fuelremaining fallsbelow  
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be  
illuminated.  
• If the engine temperaturerises above nor-  
mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-  
nated.  
• If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph  
(135 km/h), the entire speedometer will  
be illuminated.  
• In cars with automatic transmission, if the  
selector lever is moved from D to position  
M or L, the selector indication on the main  
instrument panel will be illuminated.  
24-hour 12-hour 12-hour 12-hour  
CHECK messages can be displayed in six  
language options: English, Swedish,  
German, French, Italian and Spanish.  
Clock  
Set the clock by means of the two buttons  
under the digital clock on the left of the dis-  
play.  
Selecting units and language  
1 Press CLEAR and SET simultaneously  
for four seconds until a chime sounds.  
When the ignition key is in the OFF position  
or removed, the clock can be illuminated  
(approx. 10 seconds) by pressing one of  
the SID buttons (not the NIGHT PANEL but-  
ton).  
2 Press  
or  
to select the  
to select the  
required units.  
3 Touch SET.  
4 Press  
required language.  
or  
To restore the displays and lighting to the  
normalmode, presstheNight-Panelbutton.  
5 Touch SET.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
69  
Switches  
1
2
Daytime running lights  
The parking lights and daytime running  
lights come on automatically when the igni-  
tion switch is ON.  
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not  
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature  
can be disconnected: switch off the engine  
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 229).  
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-  
ning Lights must not be disconnected as  
they are a Canadian Federal legal require-  
ment.  
Light switches  
1 High beam signal  
2 High/low beam switching  
Headlights  
High beam flasher  
The headlights come on to high beam when  
the stalk is pulled to the first spring-loaded  
position (position 1) and remain on until the  
stalk is released.  
Theheadlightscomeonautomaticallywhen  
the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.  
The parking lights, however, can be on  
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
Parking lights  
The parking lights can be switched on  
regardless of the position of the ignition  
switch. Do not use parking lights when driv-  
ing.  
Note: The lighting switch must be in parking  
light or headlight position (low beam posi-  
tion only) to operate the fog lights (see page  
72).  
High/low beam  
To switch between high and low beam, pull  
the control stalk fully towards you  
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the  
indicator on the main instrument panel will  
be illuminated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
70  
Instruments and controls  
Courtesy Headlight Feature  
A delay function allows the headlights to  
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds  
after the driver’s door has been closed.  
WARNING  
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail  
lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle  
stops suddenly, you may be unable to  
avoid a crash and therefore risk injury to  
yourself and others.  
To activate this function,  
• Switch off the ignition and remove the key  
• Open the driver’s door  
• Pull the high/low beam control stalk  
towards the steering wheel like you are  
flashing thehigh beam, seepage 69. The  
low beam headlights will now come on  
immediately after the driver’s door has  
been closed (within 30 seconds) and will  
remain on for about 30 seconds.  
Rear fog light  
The length of time for this function can be  
adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer.  
Rear fog light  
Press the button to switch on the rear fog  
light, which will only come on if the head-  
lights are on.  
The rear fog light will go off automatically  
when the engine is switched off. When the  
fog light is next needed, it will have to be  
switched on manually again.  
The rear fog light consists of one light so it  
should not be mistaken for brake lights.  
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-  
cable provincial/state law regarding the  
use of rear fog lights.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instruments and controls  
71  
Turn signal and lane change indica-  
tors  
To switch on the turn signals/lane change  
indicators, move the stalk up or down.  
1
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a  
right or left turn, and the indicators are can-  
celled automatically (stalk returns to off  
position).  
The stalk also has an intermediate,  
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-  
nalling when changing lanes or passing.  
0
2
The respective indicator lights on the instru-  
ment panel flash at the same frequency as  
the direction indicators.  
Instrument illumination  
Turn signal and lane change indicators  
1 Right indicators  
2 Left indicators  
Instrument illumination  
The brightness of the instrument illumina-  
tion can be varied by means of the dimmer  
switch adjacent to the headlight switch.  
(See also Night panel on page 67).  
In daylight or other equally bright light, the  
instrument and switch illumination is auto-  
matically extinguished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
Instruments and controls  
WARNING  
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car  
has to be left at the roadside on account  
of a crash, engine trouble or a puncture. If  
youcarryawarningtriangleorflares, they  
shouldbesetupalongthesideoftheroad  
300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle. If the  
car is not clearly visible (e.g. over the  
brow of a hill or bridge), place the trian-  
gle/flare even further back.  
Reversing lights  
Hazard warning lights  
Front fog lights (certain models)  
The front fog lights can be activated in both  
low beam headlight and parking light posi-  
tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor  
visibility conditions.  
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-  
cable provincial/state law regarding the  
use of fog lights.  
The reversing lights come on automatically  
when reverse gear is engaged or selected  
with the ignition switched on.  
Hazard warning lights  
When this button is pressed, all the turn  
signal indicators and a symbol in the button  
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,  
both indicator lights on the instrument panel  
will also flash.  
If the hazard warning lights are left on for  
some time, the flasher frequency will be  
reduced to save the battery.  
Hazard warning lights should only be used  
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road  
users.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instruments and controls  
73  
Wipers and washers  
1
0
There are three intermittent wiper positions.  
1
Moving the control stalk to the  
spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will  
produce a single sweep of the wipers.  
The wipers are designed for optimal clean-  
ing at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,  
it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweep-  
ing” sound. This may be due to the  
increased air pressure on the blades at  
higher speeds.  
4
3
2
2
Headlight washers (certain models)  
Iflowbeamison,theheadlightsarewashed  
every fifth time the windshield washers are  
used or if 2 minutes have elapsed since the  
windshield was last washed. The headlight  
washers cannot be activated separately.  
Control for setting wiper delay  
1 Long delay  
2 Short delay  
0 OFF  
1 Intermittent operation  
2 Low speed  
3 High speed  
4 Washers  
The headlight washers are of the high-pres-  
sure type, which means that other parts of  
the car may become wet if you activate the  
washers while the car is stationary.  
Activate the system by lifting the control  
stalk to position 1. The wipers make one  
sweep for reference to see how much water  
and snow is on the windshield. In future, the  
sensor compares the amount of water and  
snow on the windshield with this reference  
value.  
NOTICE  
Rain sensing wipers (option)  
To avoid damaging the windshield  
wipers, turn the rain sensor off before  
washing the car in an automatic carwash.  
WARNING  
When the engine has been switched off,  
the control stalk must be moved to posi-  
tion 0andbacktoposition1toreactivate  
the sensor.  
Set the sensitivity using the control on the  
wiper stalk (the same control as used for  
wiper delay on cars not fitted with a rain sen-  
sor). The sensor has three sensitivity set-  
tings. It is most sensitive when in the upper-  
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is  
ON when clearing snow and ice from the  
windshield, to avoid personal injury.  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on  
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.  
The system varies between single sweeps  
of the windshield and continuous wiping  
depending on how much water or snow  
there is on the windshield.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
74  
Instruments and controls  
most position (1). When a higher degree of  
sensitivity is selected, the wipers make one  
sweep of the windshield for reference.  
The rain sensor has a daylight and a night  
time mode. The sensor measures the  
amount of available light and automatically  
selectstheappropriatemode. Thesensoris  
more sensitive at night. The function of the  
rain sensor is impaired by dry snow.  
Rear-window wiper (9-5 Wagon)  
The rear-window wiper and washer are  
operatedwiththesamestalk switchasused  
for washing and wiping the windshield and  
headlights.  
1
2
This stalk has two additional switches,  
ON/OFF and  
.
The ON position provides intermittent wip-  
ing.  
The  
position provides washing and  
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops  
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has  
been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-  
pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear  
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to  
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.  
Rear-window wiper  
1 Intermittent wiping  
2 Washers  
A spring-loaded position between the OFF  
and ON positions allows for a single sweep  
of the rear-window wiper.  
Intermittent wiping of the rear window  
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the  
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,  
see page 73.  
For how to adjust the rear window washer  
jet on the 9-5 Wagon, refer to page 213.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
75  
Automatic climate  
control (ACC)  
ºF  
ºC  
ºF  
ºC  
The ACC system automatically works to  
maintain the desired temperature inside the  
car.  
AUTO  
ECON OFF  
4
The system will achieve the desired temper-  
ature inthe quickest possible way. Note that  
selectingahigherorlowertemperaturethan  
that desired will not speed up the process.  
For the ACC system to be most effective, all  
windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be  
closed.  
2
5
6
AUTO  
1
9
3
ECON OFF  
7
8
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan  
inletgrilleadjacenttothebottom edgeofthe  
windshield. The air flows through a filter  
upstream of the ACC system before deliv-  
ery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via  
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then  
through outlets on either side of the car  
behind the rear bumper.  
ACC panel  
6 Recirculation: ON/OFF  
7 A/C compressor: ON/OFF  
8 ACC system: ON/OFF  
1 Temperature setting: LH side  
2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically  
3 Manual setting of fan speed  
9 Temperature setting: RH side  
4 Manual setting of air distribution  
5 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF  
The incoming air is treated in three stages:  
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-  
midified and cooled and, finally, if required,  
heated.  
The filter is a combined particle and char-  
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of nox-  
ious substances such as benzene and tolu-  
ene are also reduced.  
To reduce the likelihood of misting on the  
insides of the windows, the glass should be  
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How  
often this will need to be done depends on  
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in  
the car, cleaning will need to be done more  
frequently.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
76  
Instruments and controls  
The system has five sensors:  
1
• Outdoor temperature sensor  
• Interior temperature sensor  
• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the fascia)  
Two blended-air temperature sensors  
(mounted inside the front floor vents)  
Note If anything is placed over the sun sen-  
sor, the ACC system will not function prop-  
erly.  
Panel vent  
Panel vents  
The panel vents swivel universally, so that  
air can be directed as desired. In winter, for  
instance, the outer vents can be directed  
onto the door windows for enhanced  
demisting.  
The flow of air through the panel vents can  
be controlled individually for each vent by  
means of the adjacent control. The climate  
control system works best if the panel vents  
are open. If you find the air cold or that it is  
drafty, start by directing the air away from  
thebody. Ifthecenterventisaimedup, itwill  
cool the interior temperature sensor and  
you may need to adjust ACC up or down,  
depending upon temperature desired.  
2
1 Interior-temperature sensor  
2 Sun sensor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
77  
Settings when HI selected:  
Temperature control  
The cabin is divided into two temperature  
zones:  
• Maximum heat  
• Air distribution to windshield and floor  
• Recirculation OFF (even if manually  
selected before)  
• Fan: high speed  
• The driver’s zone  
• The passenger zone (front and rear  
seats)  
The desired temperature can be set  
• Settings shown on ACC display  
Settings when LO selected:  
between 58 and 82°F (15 and 27°C). In  
addition, there are also HI and LO settings  
(see below). The HI and LO settings for the  
passenger zone can only be selected if they  
are also selected for the driver’s zone.  
• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will  
run even if ECON manually selected  
before)  
The displayed temperature is not the abso-  
lute temperature but corresponds to the  
comfort level normally experienced at that  
temperature after allowance has been  
madefortheair flow, relativehumidity, solar  
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside  
the car.  
• Air distribution through panel vents  
• Fan: maximum speed  
• Recirculation ON  
Air vent at rear side window  
• Settings shown on ACC display  
• The most usual temperature setting is  
64–76°F (18–24°C), depending on per-  
sonal preference and what clothing is  
worn.  
• It is recommended that changes in the  
temperature setting be made in steps of  
2°F (1°C).  
• Once the desired climate has been  
achieved, the rear center vents can be  
closed to prevent warm air being distrib-  
uted at face height.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
Instruments and controls  
Functions  
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.  
Ifamanualfunctionis selected, itwillbelockedinbutotherfunctions  
will be controlled automatically.  
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.  
A/C compressor OFF.  
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution  
and fan speed still under automatic control.  
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and  
recirculation will all be controlled automatically.  
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is  
switched off at 32°F (0°C).  
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is  
switched on at 41°F (+5°C).  
ACC system OFF.  
Fan OFF.  
A/C compressor OFF.  
Warm air OFF.  
If at the start the outside air temperature is 32–41°F  
(0 – +5°C), the A/C compressor is switched off.  
Air-distributionselectionslockedincurrentsettings.  
Recirculation can be selected manually.  
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into  
automatic mode.  
Pressing the OFF button again will result in the sys-  
tem reverting to any previous manual settings.  
• Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous  
manual selections.  
• Pressing AUTO a second time will result in all the  
automatically selected settings being displayed.  
When the engine is started, the A/C system is in  
AUTO mode, apart from any currently set program,  
see page 81 and 82).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
79  
The rear-window and door-mirror heating is  
controlled manually.  
To increase the fan speed in steps.  
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the  
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed  
until the engine is running.  
Switch off the heating as soon as the rear window  
is clear, to avoid imposing a heavy load on the bat-  
tery longer than necessary. Note, however, that the  
heating will go off automatically after 2–10 minutes  
(depending on the outdoor temperature) or sooner  
if the voltage in the electrical system falls below  
10 V.  
The ACC system can be programmed to switch on  
the heating automatically when the outdoor temper-  
ature is below 41°F (+5°C) and the temperature  
inside the car is below 50°F (+10°C) (see ”Program-  
ming I and II”, on pages 81 and 82).  
To decrease the fan speed in steps.  
If the fan is set to 0, the A/C compressor will cut out  
and ECON will appear on the display.  
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the  
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed  
until the engine is running.  
Recirculation is selected automatically for effective  
cooling, but it can also be switched on/off manually.  
Although recirculation does not substantially affect  
the air quality, it is useful to prevent unpleasant  
smells or fumes being drawn into the car from  
outside.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
Instruments and controls  
Air distribution  
Press once: Defrosting of all windows will take  
place (air flow to rear side windows shut off) with:  
Defroster & floor vents  
• The fan running at high speed.  
• Air being distributed to the defroster vents.  
• Normal temperature control will operate.  
• Recirculation will be OFF.  
• Heating of the rear window and door mirrors will  
be switched ON.  
The defroster function will continue to operate until  
a new selection is made, although the heating for  
the rear window and door mirrors will be switched  
off automatically after 2–10 minutes, depending on  
the temperature outside.  
Floor vents and rear side windows  
Presstwice:Airwillbedirectedontothewindshield  
with no increase in the fan speed. The heating for  
the rear window will not be switched on.  
To revert to the previous selection, press the AUTO  
button.  
Floor & panel vents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
81  
Programming I  
Manual selections can be programmed into the ACC system so that  
these will take effect when the car is started. Note that the ignition  
must be switched off for at least ten minutes after programming for  
the selections to be saved in the system’s memory.  
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.  
2 Select the desired settings.  
3 Press  
and  
, simultaneously  
Panel (and center rear vent)  
Starting in cold weather  
(the display will flash to confirm that the settings have been  
recorded).  
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-  
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.  
Example: If you want air distribution through the panel vents when  
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor  
vents and the fan speed will be increased.  
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the  
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by  
the system.  
you start the car, press  
and then save the setting by pressing  
and  
.
Cancelling the programmed settings (I)  
To cancel the programmed settings, press  
and  
simultaneously (the display will flash to confirm that the settings  
have been cancelled).  
Starting in hot weather  
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents  
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the  
ECON switch has been pressed).  
If the outdoor temperature is above 86°F (30°C), the system might  
selectrecirculationafterapproximately15 secondsifthis is required  
in order to reach the desired temperature.  
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan  
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
82  
Instruments and controls  
Programming II  
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to  
driving and weather conditions.  
Recirculation will be  
Recirculation is  
switched on if the speed of  
switched on about  
thecarislessthan6 mph(10 45 seconds after start-  
km/h)andwill be switched off ing if the outdoor tem-  
when the speed has risen  
above20 mph (30 km/h), but (+30°C) and the  
not if the ECON mode has selected temperature  
beenprogrammedaccording for the cabin is well  
to ”Programming II”. below the actual tem-  
To prevent misting, this func- perature in both tem-  
tion is disengaged at outdoor perature zones.  
temperatures lower than  
45°F (+7°C) and engaged at  
temperatures above 50°F  
Function Operation in AUTO mode Standard operation  
peratureis above86°F  
after Programming II  
in AUTO mode  
The A/C compressor will not A/C compressor cuts  
activate unless the outdoor in when outdoor tem-  
temperature is above 55°F  
(+13°C).  
–This function saves fuel by  
delaying the activation of the  
A/C compressor. However,  
in wet weather it is advisable  
to have the A/C compressor  
running when outdoor tem-  
peratures are below 57°F  
(+14°C), as the A/C system  
reduces the likelihood of the  
windows fogging up.  
peratureisabove41°F  
(+5°C)  
(+10°C).  
–This function is useful to  
prevent fumes being drawn  
into the car in traffic jams.  
The heating will come on  
Rear-window heating  
about five seconds after the can only be switched  
engine has started if the out- on manually.  
door temperature is below  
41°F (+5°C).  
–This function helps to pre-  
vent ice or mist forming on  
the rear window in cold,  
damp weather. Fuel con-  
sumption may increase  
slightly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instruments and controls  
83  
To program a function or to cancel a programmed function, press  
and hold in the relevant button until the corresponding symbol has  
flashed four times on the display and a chime has sounded.  
Calibration  
If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the system will  
need to be recalibrated.  
Make sure the ignition is ON.  
To start the calibration procedure:  
1 Start the engine.  
Function Text displayed on SID Text displayed on SID  
during programming  
when cancelling  
program  
2 Press  
and  
simultaneously.  
Calibration takes about 30 seconds. During this time and for about  
3 seconds after the operation has been completed, the number of  
fault codes (if any) stored in the system will appear in the tempera-  
ture display on the left. The fault codes themselves will be shown in  
the temperature display on the right.  
ACC: LO TEMP  
A/C CTRL  
ACC: NORMAL  
A/C CTRL  
ACC: RECIRC  
ACC: SPEED CTRL  
ACC: RECIRC  
ACC: NORMAL CTRL  
Useful tips  
(Before driving the car to an authorized Saab dealer)  
ACC: AUTO  
RDEFR CTRL  
ACC: MANUAL  
RDEFR CTRL  
• If AUTO is not shown on the display, see ”Cancelling the pro-  
grammed settings (I)” on page 81.  
• If you suspect that the ACC system is not functioning properly,  
cancel (delete) all programmed settings and then recalibrate the  
system.  
Example: To have the ACC system switch the heating for the rear  
window and door mirrors ON/OFF automatically, press and hold in  
See ”Cancelling the programmed settings (I) and (II)”, pages 81  
and 82, and ”Calibration” above.  
Note that AUTO will show on the display even if you have com-  
pleted Programming II, but that this does not apply to Program-  
ming I.  
• If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the ACC system  
will need to be recalibrated. See ”Calibration” above.  
• If the system starts in OFF mode, cancel the programme. Refer to  
Cancelling the programmed settings (I) on page 81.  
until the symbol has flashed four times on the display and a  
chime has sounded.  
The display shows:  
ACC: AUTO  
RDEFR CTRL  
Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will  
remain in the system until you cancel the program.  
AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved  
in ”Programming II”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
84  
Instruments and controls  
Condensation  
Formation of ice and mist in  
Fault diagnosis and maintenance,  
see page 252.  
extremes of weather  
When the A/C system is running, the intake  
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-  
densation is drained off through two outlets  
underneaththefloorofthecar, inthevicinity  
of the front doors.  
It is only in the most extreme conditions that  
icing and misting of window glass are likely  
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or  
severe cold coupled with high relative  
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-  
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes.  
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to  
be seen dripping from these outlets when  
the car is parked. Greater amounts of con-  
densation will result in warmer, more humid  
ambient air.  
The following measures are recommended  
if such problems should occur:  
1 Select AUTO and 70°F (21°C) for both  
temperature zones.  
2 Select Defroster.  
If this is not enough...  
3 Increase the fan speed.  
If this is not enough...  
4 Select a higher temperature.  
The following measures are recommended  
if the occupants feel that it is cold and drafty  
in the car:  
1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully  
open, including the center rear vent.  
If this is not enough...  
2 Direct the air flow away from the body  
(butnottowardstheinteriortemperature  
sensor).  
If this is not enough...  
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree  
or two. If this is not enough...  
4 Lower the fan speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
85  
Saab 9-5 Audio  
System  
Quick guide to the Saab  
9-5 Audio System ____  
87  
Sound controls _______  
Radio _______________  
Cassette player _______  
CD player ____________  
CD changer __________  
89  
90  
92  
95  
97  
Programmable functions 101  
Steering-wheel controls  
Security lock _________  
Technical data________  
Fault codes __________  
102  
103  
104  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio  
System, we recommend that you read  
through this entire section.  
The Saab 9-5 Audio System is available in  
two versions: Premium on the 9-5 Linear  
and Prestige on the 9-5 Arc and 9-5 Aero  
Both models have been specially matched  
to the Saab 9-5 cabin.  
The Audio System is connected to the Saab  
Information Display (SID), which is at the  
top of the main instrument panel. Mes-  
sages, indicators and the like for the Audio  
System are shown on this display.  
Indicator  
AS  
Radio is in Autostore mode  
RDM  
Random playback of CD  
tracks when CD player  
selected  
DOLBY B noise reduction  
on for cassette player  
(DOLBY B)  
The two systems are comprised of a radio,  
CD player and cassette player.  
A six-disc CD changer for installation in the  
luggage compartment is available as a  
dealer-installed accessory/option.  
The Premium system has seven speakers:  
three mounted in the fascia (the center  
speaker further enhances the overall sound  
image) and one in each door.  
The Prestige system (Harman Kardon) has  
nine speakers (9-5 Sport Wagon has eight  
speakers): three mounted in the fascia (the  
center speaker further enhances the sound  
image), one in each door and two subwoof-  
ers in the rear window shelf (9-5 Sport  
Wagon: one subwoofer in the luggage com-  
partment). The subwoofers enhance repro-  
duction of the lowest bass notes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
87  
Quick guide to the  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Radio (see page 90)  
Preset station buttons  
1
4
2
5
3
6
Press once: play the preset station.  
Press & hold briefly: store a new station.  
Auto tuning  
ON  
PUSH  
PULL  
VOL  
Press once: auto (seek) tuning.  
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):  
manual tuning.  
To switch the system ON, press the volume but-  
ton. The last settings used will be activated.  
If the Audio System is switched on when the igni-  
tion key is not in the switch, the system will auto-  
matically be switched off after one hour has  
elapsed since a control button on the radio was  
last pressed.  
ON  
BAL  
SEEK  
Press once: Autostore ON/OFF.  
Press & hold briefly: automatic tuning and  
storing of the 6 strongest stations.  
AS  
SEARCH  
OFF  
To switch the system OFF, press the volume but-  
ton or remove the ignition key.  
VOL  
Press once: change waveband.  
To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control.  
BAL  
To adjust the balance between the left and right  
channels, pull out and turn the VOL control.  
Press once: activate radio.  
BAS  
BAS TRE  
FAD  
Press to release the button, and adjust the bass  
level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.  
TRE  
Press to release the button, and adjust the tre-  
ble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.  
FAD  
Press to release the button, and adjust the fade  
between the front and rear sets of speakers.  
Lock the setting by pushing the button in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
88  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Cassette player. See page 92  
Remove CD.  
Pressonce:Selectscassetteplayerwhenother  
source active.  
When tape playing: Dolby B ON/OFF.  
CD changer (accessory/option). See page 97  
Switch to playback other side of tape.  
Press once: Change to CD changer when CD  
player is active.  
CD  
RDM  
Presstwice:ChangetoCDchangerwhenradio  
or cassette player is active.  
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):  
Random playback of entire magazine.  
Eject.  
Press once: Track search on current disc.  
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play.  
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once: Switch  
between Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track  
search (TRACK).  
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a  
chime will sound): Scan/disc.  
SEEK  
Press once: Music search (next track).  
Press & hold briefly: Fast forward/rewind.  
Press SEEK (mid-segment) (a chime will  
sound): Blank skip ON/OFF.  
SEEK  
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold  
(2 chimes): Scan/magazine.  
CD player. See page 95  
Press once: switch to CD player when other  
Selects disc in magazine.  
CD  
source active.  
1
4
2
5
3
6
RDM  
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):  
Random playback.  
Press once: Track search.  
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play (passage  
search) or Fast track search.  
SEEK  
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once (a chime  
will sound): Switches between Rapid play  
(PLAY) and Fast track search (TRACK).  
PressSEEK(mid-segment) &hold briefly(a  
chime will sound): Scan disc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
89  
Sound controls  
ON/OFF  
The Audio System will come on:  
• When the volume control is pressed.  
• When the ignition is switched ON, if the  
Audio System was on when the ignition  
key was last removed.  
The Audio System will be switched off:  
• When the volume control is pressed.  
• When the ignition key is removed.  
• One hour after the ignition was switched  
OFF, if the ignition key has not been  
removed.  
• When one hour has elapsed since a con-  
trol button on the Audio System was last  
pressed after the ignition key was  
removed.  
BAS – Bass  
TRE – Treble  
Rotate clockwise to increase the level and  
counter-clockwise to reduce it.  
The Bass and Treble controls must be  
pressed first to release them.  
FAD – Fader  
VOL – Volume  
BAL – Balance  
Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust  
the balance between the left and right  
speakers. When the control is released, it  
reverts to the volume function.  
The fader control adjusts the balance  
betweenthefrontandrearsetsofspeakers.  
The Fader controls must be pressed first to  
release it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Radio  
Press the RADIO/BAND button to switch to  
the radio when another source is active.  
Preset station buttons (1)  
Press once (release within a second) to  
select a preset station, e.g.  
The small figure on the far right of the dis-  
play is the number of the preset button  
selected.  
Presetting a station  
Press and hold in the desired button (for  
more than a second) to store the currently  
tuned station. During this time, the radio will  
be mute. The sound will return as soon as  
the station has been stored.  
Tuning (2)  
Automatic seek tuning:  
Press  
briefly to search for higher fre-  
quencies or  
Manual tuning:  
for lower frequencies.  
To switch to the manual-tuning function,  
press or and release quickly  
(a chime will sound and the M indicator will  
appear on the display).  
The function will revert to automatic seek  
tuningtwo secondsafter the lastmanual fre-  
quency change has been made.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
91  
Waveband selector (3)  
AS, Autostore (4)  
Press the RADIO/BAND button repeatedly  
to move through the waveband selections:  
FM1, FM2, and AM.  
The autostore mode provides an additional  
preset function that can be used to search  
for and to store stations when you are in an  
area where you are unfamiliar with the sta-  
tions and their frequencies.  
Press the AS/SEARCH button to switch the  
Autostore mode ON/OFF. When the  
Autostore mode is ON, the AS indicator will  
show at the bottom of the display.  
Press and hold in the AS/SEARCH button  
for more than a second to initiate a search  
for the six strongest stations.  
Each time the system finds and stores a sta-  
tion, the number on the far right of the dis-  
play will change. If the system cannot find  
six stations with good reception, the remain-  
ing preset buttons will be empty. If one of  
these empty buttons is pressed, U**** (FM)  
or AM**** will appear on the display.  
When the system leaves the AS mode, it  
returns to the station that was selected  
before the AS mode was activated.  
The AS mode can also be used in the AM  
band.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Cassette player  
Before playing a tape, make sure that the  
label is secure and that the cassette is not  
warped, otherwise the cassette can  
become jammed in the deck. The cassette  
player automatically senses whether the  
tape is normal or metal (Type I or Type II).  
5
TAPE (1)  
Turn on the cassette player by pressing  
2
4
or by inserting a cassette in the  
deck, with the exposed tape to the right.  
Playbackwillstartwiththesidethatisfacing  
up (indicated by A on the display). The dis-  
play will now be as follows:  
1
3
Dolby® noise reduction (3)  
Press TAPE/DOLBY to switch on  
Dolby NR B.  
Dolby B should be on for playback of tapes  
recorded with Dolby B, and off for those  
recorded without Dolby B.  
Eject button (4)  
To stop playback of a tape, press the eject  
Playback direction (2)  
button or select another source.  
To play the other side of the tape,  
If you select another source without press-  
ing the eject button, the tape will remain in  
the deck but the head and pinch rollers will  
be clear of the tape. The same applies if the  
Audio System is switched off while a tape is  
being played. Tapes can still be ejected  
when the system is turned off.  
press  
.
The deckwill automatically changetheplay-  
back direction when the end of the tape is  
reached, be it during playback, fast  
forward/rewind or music search.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
93  
Music search forward/reverse (5)  
Fast forward/rewind  
Auto music search (Blank skip)  
To switch the Blank-skip function ON/OFF,  
To search forward for a track, press  
and release quickly (within half a second).  
The following will now appear on the dis-  
play:  
Press and hold  
to start fast-  
forward to the end of the tape. The following  
will now appear on the display:  
press and hold  
(mid-segment).  
When the Blank-skip function is active (dis-  
play: BL SKIP ON), unrecorded gaps that  
are longer than 15 seconds will automati-  
cally be skipped.  
When auto music search is in progress, the  
following will show on the display:  
Press  
once to cancel fast-forward.  
(mid-segment)  
To perform a backward search, press  
instead.  
A forward search will continue until a gap of  
at least 4 seconds is found, or until you  
Press and hold  
briefly to switch to music search.  
Fast rewind (<< WIND) is performed in the  
same way as fast forward.  
If a track has been recorded at an unusually  
low level and is therefore identified incor-  
rectly as a gap between tracks, it could ini-  
tiate a spurious ”auto music search”.  
press  
or  
(mid-segment).  
Pressing and holding the button during a  
search will initiate the fast-forward function.  
To cancel such a search, press and hold  
(mid-segment) during playback.  
The following will now appear on the dis-  
play:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Type II (metal) tapes  
The cassette has an automatic tape-type  
selector.  
Tape care  
Do not expose cassette tapes to direct sun-  
light or to extremes of temperature as this  
can damage the cassette and the tape.  
Cleaning-due indicator  
After 30 hours’ playing time, the following  
message will appear on the display:  
Always keep cassettes in their boxes when  
not in use.  
If a cassette should become jammed in the  
deck, contact an authorized Saab dealer.  
The message will be displayed for ten  
seconds each time the cassette player is  
selected.  
A cleaning tape should be used to clean the  
headsinsidethecassetteplayer tomaintain  
good reproduction and to prevent unneces-  
sary wear.  
To reset the playing-time meter:  
1 Remove the current tape.  
2 Load the cleaning tape andplay it for the  
required time.  
3 Remove the cleaning tape and reload  
the other one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
95  
CD player  
3
NOTICE  
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio  
System. In certain cases, this type of CD  
is only suitable for home use and can  
therefore cause operational problems  
(overheating).  
1
To select the CD mode, load a CD into the  
deck or, if one is already loaded, press the  
CD/RDM button.  
Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the  
mechanism to load it automatically. Play-  
backofthefirsttrackwillstartandthefollow-  
ing message will appear on the display:  
2
Track search (1)  
Press or  
Rapid play (passage search)  
repeatedly to move  
When  
or  
is pressed and  
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing  
held,rapidplaywillbeinitiated,withthetime  
and track showing on the display, e.g.:  
once will restart playback from the  
A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the  
left of the disctray is illuminatedwhenadisc  
is loaded.  
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play  
the preceding track, press  
twice.  
When all the tracks have been played, the  
CD player will restart playback from track 1.  
To cancel playback, press the eject, RADIO  
or TAPE button.  
If the button is depressed for more than  
5 seconds,therapidplaywillbeevenfaster.  
Rapid play stops when the button is  
released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
96  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Press any segment of the SEEK button  
during scanning to play the current track  
from the beginning and simultaneously  
cancel the SCAN function.  
Fast track search  
Random playback (RDM) (2)  
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to  
select/deselect random playback of the cur-  
rent disc. When this function is selected,  
RDM will appear at the bottom of the dis-  
play.  
Press  
(mid-segment) once to  
switch between the CD-PLAY and  
CD-TRACK modes.  
Eject (3)  
Press  
to remove the disc.  
Press  
oncetomovefromthecurrent  
track to the next during random playback.  
If you press the eject button to open the tray  
but do not remove the disc, the CD player  
will automatically close the tray again after  
10 seconds, without restarting playback.  
Press once to repeat the current  
track during random playback.  
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes  
change the function of  
and  
.
Pressing and holding  
start Rapid play.  
or  
will  
The selected mode will also be active the  
next time the system is switched on.  
Choose the mode that you find most conve-  
nient:  
SCAN  
To start the SCAN function, which enables  
you to hear a sample of each track on the  
CD PLAY  
Pressing and holding  
disc, press and hold  
(mid-seg-  
or  
briefly  
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in  
progress and which track is currently being  
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN  
while playing the first track, the following  
display will appear:  
starts Rapid play  
CD TRACK Pressing and holding  
or  
briefly  
starts Fast track search  
The sample playback starts 30 seconds  
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-  
onds.  
When all the tracks on the disc have been  
scanned, the system will revert to playback  
of the track that was playing when SCAN  
was selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
97  
2
3
1
4
CD changer in luggage compartment,  
Saab 9-5 Sedan  
CD changer in luggage compartment,  
Saab 9-5 Wagon  
Changing a CD  
To select the CD changer  
To load the CD changer (which is installed  
in the luggage compartment and can  
• If the Audio System is in the RADIO or  
TAPE mode, press the CD/RDM button  
twice.  
CD changer  
accommodate six CDs) proceed as follows:  
(accessory)  
1 Slide the top back.  
2 Lift out the CD magazine.  
3 Press back the catch on the magazine.  
4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and  
swap/load the CD (label side up).  
• If the CD player is active, press the  
CD/RDM button once.  
If the CDs in the magazine have not been  
changed, the system will start playback  
from where it left off before.  
NOTICE  
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio  
System. In certain cases, this type of CD  
is only suitable for home use and can  
therefore cause operational problems  
(overheating).  
If there is no magazine in the CD changer,  
the following will appear on the display:  
5 Slide the tray back into the magazine.  
Note the position of the magazine for load-  
ing (see picture).  
Insert the entire magazine carefully inside  
the CD changer and slide back the cover.  
Important! Always keep the sliding cover  
closed to keep dust out of the CD changer,  
so that it willcontinueto provide satisfactory  
service for a long time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
98  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
If the magazine in the CD changer is empty,  
the following will appear on the display:  
1
2
If the CD changer is activated right after a  
magazine has been loaded, the following  
will appear on the display:  
The CD number will change as each CD is  
played.  
After a magazine has been loaded, play-  
back will start with the first track on the first  
CD when the CD changer is selected, and  
the following will appear on the display:  
3
If the selected CD-tray is empty, the follow-  
ing will appear on the display:  
Selecting CDs (1)  
When the CD changer is operating, the  
radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in  
the magazine. Press the button for the  
corresponding CD.  
If the selected CD is already being played,  
playback will restart from the first track.  
After two seconds, the status of the trays in  
the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be  
shown on the display, e.g.:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
99  
If for some reason the CD selected by the  
preset button cannot be played, playback of  
the current CD will continue.  
Track search (2)  
1
Press  
or  
repeatedly to move  
2
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing  
once will restart playback from the  
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play  
the preceding track, press  
twice.  
Rapid play  
When  
or  
is pressed and  
held,rapidplaywillbeinitiated,withthetime  
and track showing on the display, e.g.:  
3
Choose the mode that you find most  
convenient:  
Fast track search  
If the button is depressed for more than  
5 seconds,therapidplaywillbeevenfaster.  
Rapid play stops when the button is  
released.  
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch  
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK  
modes.  
CD PLAY  
Pressing and holding  
or  
briefly  
starts Rapid play  
CD TRACK Pressing and holding  
or  
briefly  
starts Fast track search  
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes  
change the function of  
and  
.
The selected mode will also be active the  
next time the system is switched on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
100  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Scanning the entire magazine:  
SCAN  
Random playback (RDM) (3)  
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to  
select/deselect random playback of the  
CDs in the magazine. When this function is  
selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of  
the display.  
Scanning the current CD:  
Press and hold  
(mid-segment -  
To start the SCAN function, which enables  
you to hear a sample of each track on the  
disc, press and hold  
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in  
progress and which track is currently being  
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN  
while playing track one, the following dis-  
play will appear:  
two chimes) to start a scan of the entire  
magazine. A message similar to the follow-  
ing will appear on the display:  
(mid-seg-  
Press  
once to move from the current  
track to the next during random playback.  
Press once to repeat the current  
track during random playback.  
The sample playback starts 30 seconds  
after the beginning of the first track on each  
CD and lasts for 8 seconds.  
Pressing and holding  
start Rapid play.  
or  
will  
To stop playback from the CD changer,  
simply select once to move from the current  
track to the next during random playback  
(RADIO/TAPE/ CD). The CD changer will  
now enter stand-by mode.  
After the first track of each CD has been  
sampled, the CD changer will revert to play-  
back of the track that was playing when  
SCAN was selected.  
Press any segment of the SEEK button  
during scanning to play the current track  
from the beginning and simultaneously  
cancel the SCAN function.  
The sample playback starts 30 seconds  
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-  
onds.  
When all the tracks on the disc have been  
scanned, the system will revert to playback  
of the track that was playing when SCAN  
was selected.  
Press any segment of the SEEK button  
during scanning to play the current track  
from the beginning and simultaneously  
cancel the SCAN function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saab 9-5 Audio System 101  
Adjusting the volume  
Speed-dependent volume  
(SP D VOL) ON/OFF  
Programmable  
functions  
The default setting for START VOL is  
volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is  
volume setting 14 (the highest volume set-  
ting is 30).  
WARNING  
Maximum START VOL  
These functions should only be carried  
out when the car is stationary.  
To change the default setting:  
The default setting for this function is ON.  
– Press and hold the WB button at the  
same time as you switch on the Audio  
System.  
Volume-preset mode  
To select the volume-preset mode, press  
and hold the WB button at the same time as  
you switch the Audio System on.  
– Select SP D VOL using  
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.  
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-  
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-  
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new  
default setting.  
• TELVOL  
Use the  
desired function.  
button to select the  
The following volume settings can be  
preselected:  
• START VOL – maximum volume level  
when the Audio System is switched on  
To change the volume setting:  
• TELVOL – preset volume level when an  
in-car phone is activated  
• SP D VOL – speed-dependent volume.  
The Audio System will automatically  
adjust the volume level to compensate for  
background noise, such as road noise,  
which increases with vehicle speed.  
• LOUDNESS ON/OFF – boosting of the  
highest and lowest frequency ranges to  
enhance the sound image when the  
volume is set to a low level.  
– Press and hold the WB button at the  
same time as you switch on the Audio  
System.  
– Adjust the volume  
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-  
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-  
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new  
volume setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
102  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Loudness ON/OFF  
Steering-wheel controls  
To facilitate use of the Audio System and to  
promote safer driving, most of the functions  
can be operated using the integral remote  
controls on the steering wheel.  
To change the default setting:  
The default setting for this function is ON.  
Control functions:  
NXT:  
RADIO mode: preselect buttons  
12...61...  
TAPE mode: Play other side of tape.  
– Press and hold the WB button at the  
same time as you switch on the Audio  
System.  
– Select LOUDNESS using  
CD mode: Inoperative.  
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.  
CD-changer mode: Select CD in magazine  
12...61...  
Audio System controls on steering wheel  
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-  
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-  
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new  
default setting.  
<< SEEK >>:  
RADIO mode: Auto/manual tuning.  
TAPE mode:  
Music search/Fast forward or rewind.  
CD/CD-changer mode:  
Track search/Rapid play.  
SRC (source)  
Press repeatedly to switch between  
RADIO TAPE CD (CD changer)  
RADIO ...  
VOL +/–:  
Volume adjust.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saab 9-5 Audio System 103  
If the security codefor the CD changer does  
notmatchwhenthechangerisselected, the  
following will appear on the display:  
Security lock  
The Audio System is equipped with an elec-  
tronic security lock. The special code is  
unique to the car in which the Audio System  
is fitted.  
Each time the Audio System is switched on,  
a check is made to ensure that the codes  
match.  
If not, the following will appear on the dis-  
play:  
If a CD changer is to be retrofitted or if you  
wish to move the main Audio System  
module and/or CD changer to another car  
(Saab 9-5), you must consult an authorized  
Saab dealer so that the modules can be  
given the correct security codes.  
If a CD changer has been installed, it will  
also have been security coded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Frequency range (FM) ________ 40–15000 Hz  
±1 dB  
Distortion (FM) ______________ < 0.5 %  
Technical data  
Tone controls  
Bass ______________________ ±10 dB at 100 Hz  
Treble _____________________ ±10 dB at 10,000 Hz  
Cassette player  
Fast forward/rewind __________ < 120 seconds (C-60)  
Frequency range _____________ 40–16000 Hz  
±2 dB  
Wow and flutter ______________ 0.2 % WRMS  
Signal-to-noise ratio __________ 45 dB  
Dolby B NR effect ____________ 8/16 dB  
Power output  
Premium __________________ 150 W  
110 W at 1 % THD (total har-  
monic distortion) and 13.5 V  
Prestige __________________ 200 W  
150 W at 1 % THD (total har-  
monic distortion) and 13.5 V  
CD player and CD changer  
Radio module  
1-bit system and 8 x oversampling  
Radio system _______________ PLL dual-synthesizer tuner  
Number of presets:  
Frequency range _____________ 20–20000 Hz  
±0.5 dB  
Distortion __________________ < 0.008 %  
Dynamics __________________ > 80 dB (1 kHz)  
CD-changer capacity__________ 6 discs  
FM ______________________ 3 x 6  
AM ______________________ 2 x 6  
Frequency range:  
FM ______________________ 87.9–107.9 MHz  
AM ______________________ 530–1710 kHz  
Tuning steps:  
Automatic seek tuning: _______ FM 200 kHz  
AM 10 kHz  
• These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard  
• Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter  
specifications and design without prior notice.  
• Dolby noise reduction is produced under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing  
Corporation  
• ”Dolby” and the double-D symbol  
ing Corporation  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-  
Manual tuning: _____________ FM 200 kHz  
AM 10 kHz  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance  
could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Saab 9-5 Audio System 105  
Accessories and other equipment must  
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as  
these are where the airbags inflate in the  
event of a crash  
Antennas  
Multipath propagation  
The Audio System has three antennas  
incorporated in the rear window; two for FM  
diversity and one for AM.  
Multipath propagation occurs when radio  
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected  
by, e.g. large buildings, causing them to  
arrive slightly later than the direct waves.  
This can create interference to radio recep-  
tion. To avoid this problem as much as pos-  
sible the system is equipped with two FM  
antennas, so called FM diversity.  
NOTICE  
Refrain from placing hard or sharp  
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid  
damaging the antenna leads.  
WARNING  
To reduce the risk of head injuries in the  
event of a crash, the headliner and pillar  
trims incorporate energy absorbing mate-  
rial. These areas must not be modified in  
any way. Work on these areas must only  
be carried out at an authorized Saab  
dealer.  
Do not use sun protective film which con-  
tains metal particles on the rear window,  
this can be the cause of radio interfer-  
ence.  
The car has a factory-fitted roof antenna for  
a mobile phone/OnStar. Roof loads may  
negatively affect telecommunication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
Saab 9-5 Audio System  
Adjusting the frequency steps North  
America/Europe  
If the car is taken from North America to  
Europe, the radio’s frequency steps can be  
adjusted.  
Fault codes  
WARNING  
NOTICE  
The CD player/CD changer is classified  
as Class 1 laser equipment  
Great care should be exercised in trying  
to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure,  
contact an authorized Saab dealer.  
• Press and hold  
(mid-segment)  
• Service and repair work must only be  
carried out by authorized technicians.  
and switch the radio on at the same time.  
The preset stations will be cancelled and  
replaced by default frequencies.  
• If the casing is damaged, hazardous  
laser radiation can occur.  
TheAudio System has abuilt-indiagnostics  
function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is  
generated to help dealer technicians to  
diagnose the fault. Below are the codes for  
some faults that you might be able to rectify  
yourself.  
NOTICE  
All work on the Audio System must be  
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.  
Fault code  
Possible cause  
CD/CDC  
ERROR  
12/17/19  
CD is dirty, loaded  
wrong side up or defec-  
tive.  
OnStar System  
Your vehicle may be equipped with OnStar,  
a vehicle telematics communications and  
navigation system. Please consult the sep-  
arate chapter in this owner’s manual, page  
107.  
TAPE ERR 01  
Tape broken or  
mechanical fault in  
deck.  
TAPE ERR  
02/03  
Tape snarled up or  
mechanical fault in  
deck.  
TAPE ERR 11  
Cassette jammed: can-  
not be loaded/ejected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar - Telematics 107  
OnStar - Telematics  
Additional Services____  
Personal Calling: ___________  
112  
112  
The OnStar Safe & Sound  
Plan________________ 110  
Automatic notification of air bag  
Using OnStar _________ 108  
OnStar is Easy______________  
OnStar Services Button_______  
Emergency button ___________  
White dot button ____________  
System status light __________  
108  
108  
109  
109  
109  
deployment _______________  
Emergency services _________  
Roadside assistance _________  
Stolen vehicle tracking________  
Hands-free communication ____  
110  
110  
111  
111  
111  
111  
Virtual Advisor: _______  
116  
117  
117  
OnStar Subscriber  
Website ____________  
The OnStar Center_____ 110  
Limitations___________  
Connecting to the OnStar center  
110  
The OnStar Premium  
Services Plan________ 111  
Yourpersonalidentificationnumber  
(PIN) ____________________  
Additional Information _  
Warranty _________________  
A Note About Privacy________  
Transferring OnStar _________  
OnStar Subscription Information  
118  
118  
118  
118  
118  
110  
Route support ______________  
111  
Ride Assist_________________  
111  
Information and Convenience ser-  
vices ____________________  
111  
112  
Online Concierge services_____  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
OnStar - Telematics  
Your new vehicle may come equipped with  
advanced telematics hardware. OnStar  
telematics is a sophisticated in-vehicle  
system allowing convergence of wireless  
communications, GPS (Global Positioning  
System) satellites and advanced vehicle  
electronics.  
You should activate immediately to ensure  
you receive your full year of service, as your  
prepaid subscription begins at the time of  
delivery.  
Your onboard OnStar System consists of  
three buttons:  
Using OnStar  
Welcome to OnStar. This section gives you  
all the information you need to get started  
using OnStar, including descriptions of all  
OnStar services. It also introduces the  
added services of Personal Calling, Virtual  
advisor,andtheOnstarSubscriberwebsite.  
For a complete explanation of these addi-  
tional services, please see pages 112, 116  
and 117.  
OnStar Services Button  
Press this button, and you are  
connected to an OnStar advi-  
sor. You will hear a chime, fol-  
lowed by the words  
”ConnectingtoOnStar.Allow  
20–30 seconds for initial con-  
nection to the OnStar Call  
Center. An advisor will then  
help you with any of the ser-  
vices included in your OnStar  
plan.  
If cellular service is unavail-  
able, OnStar will generate a  
fast busy tone. The OnStar  
system will retry calls a num-  
ber of times before returning  
to the ready mode. To cancel  
the automatic dialing, press  
the White dot button.  
NOTE: In order for OnStar to operate, the  
car audio system must be switched on.  
Here’s how to activate your OnStar ser-  
vice:  
OnStar is Easy  
1 Push the blue OnStar button located in  
your Saab. After a prerecorded mes-  
sage explaining the benefits of OnStar,  
you will be greeted by a live OnStar advi-  
sor. The advisor will activate your  
OnStar service.  
2 Provide the information requested by  
the advisor to activate your account and  
set up your personal profile. This will  
take approximately 10–15 minutes. You  
can also provide OnStar with customer  
and driver information on their website  
at www.onstarenrollment.com. You will  
receive an e-mail confirmation with an  
OnStar account number. Once youhave  
received this information, complete the  
enrollment process from the car by  
pushing the blue OnStar button.  
If your new Saab has OnStar, it’s easy to  
start using your OnStar system. In fact,  
pressingtheOnStar buttonis usually allyou  
need to do. Once you are connected, an  
OnStar advisor will help you with the ser-  
vices in your plan.  
Inoperative if battery is discharged or  
disconnected.  
OnStar ispoweredbyyour vehicle´s battery  
and will not operate if the battery is dis-  
charged or disconnected.  
Potentially inoperative if vehicle is in a  
crash  
If your vehicle is in a crash, some compo-  
nents could be damaged or disconnected,  
potentially rendering OnStar inoperative.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
OnStar - Telematics 109  
The OnStar Center is the heart of your ser-  
vice — staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a  
week with knowledgeable OnStar advisors.  
Even on weekends and holidays, there is  
always someone ready to help.  
System status light  
Emergency button  
Solid Green — Indicates the OnStar  
system in the vehicle is powered ON and  
ready to make calls or receive calls from the  
OnStar Center.  
In an emergency, press this  
button to connect with an  
OnStar advisor. Your call will  
be given the highest priority,  
and you will hear a tone fol-  
lowed by the words ”Connect-  
ingtoOnStarEmergency.An  
advisor will locate your Saab,  
find out what kind of assis-  
tance you require, and con-  
tact the nearest emergency  
services provider who can  
dispatch ambulance, fire,  
police or other emergency  
services. Please use this but-  
ton only for true emergencies.  
OnStar uses sophisticated Global Position-  
ing System (GPS) satellites to locate your  
Saab, and wireless technology to provide  
the communications link and seamless inte-  
gration into your Saab. This system allows  
the OnStar advisors to pinpoint yourSaab´s  
location precisely. This way, advisors can  
provide you with a range of helpful services  
to protect you and your Saab. Plus, with the  
Premium Services Plan* included for 12  
months with your Saab, advisors can also  
access an extensive database to assist you  
with directions, making reservations and  
other convenience services.  
Blinking Green — The light blinks green to  
indicate a call is being connected or in  
progress. If you notice this light blinking  
while you are not on a call, press the White  
dot button.  
Red — This signals that your OnStar  
system may not be functioning properly.  
Press the OnStar button to attempt to con-  
tact an OnStar advisor. If the connection is  
made, the advisor will assist you in making  
sure your OnStar system is operating prop-  
erly. If you cannot contact the OnStar Cen-  
ter,pleasetakeyourcartothenearestSaab  
dealer for diagnosis and service.  
White dot button  
*) New retail deliveries only.  
Press this button at the end of a  
call. You’ll hear the words  
”OnStar Request Ended.”  
Also, press this button to  
answer a call from the OnStar  
Center, or cancel a call if one  
of the other buttons is acci-  
dentally pressed. This button  
is also used to access OnStar  
Personal Calling services  
which are described on page  
112.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
110  
OnStar - Telematics  
Yourpersonal identification number  
(PIN)  
The OnStar Center  
Connecting to the OnStar center  
In addition to using the 3-button system  
found in your Saab, there are two other  
ways to connect to the OnStar Center.  
The OnStar Safe &  
Sound Plan  
When you signed up with OnStar, you were  
asked to provide a Personal Identification  
Number (PIN). You’ll need your PIN to  
access many of OnStar’s services. If, for  
example, your vehicle has been stolen, an  
OnStar advisor will ask for your PIN in order  
to provide assistance.  
Changing your PIN is easy. Call the OnStar  
Center and provide the advisor with your  
current number, and he or she will assist  
you in setting up a new number. If you have  
forgotten your PIN, just call the OnStar Cen-  
ter. For security reasons, we will send your  
PIN to you in the mail.  
The OnStar Safe and Sound Plan is one of  
three plans you can purchase.* With it, you  
have access to a complete range of ser-  
vices providing you with an unsurpassed  
level of safety and security — 24 hours a  
day, 7 days a week. And you have it all at  
the touch of a button.  
Toll-Free Call  
To take advantage of your OnStar services  
fromoutside your Saab, youcancallOnStar  
toll-free at 1-888-4-OnStar  
(1-888-466-7827). Remember to have your  
Personal Identification Number (PIN)  
handy.  
So whether you’re on a lonesome country  
road or stuck in highway traffic, you have at  
your disposal a complete range of services  
providing you with unsurpassed security.  
And you have it all at the touch of a button.  
Automatic Notification  
A priority signal will be sent to the OnStar  
Center with your exact location if an airbag  
deploys.  
Automatic notification of air bag  
deployment  
Should your front air bags deploy, a priority  
signal will be sent to the OnStar Center with  
your Saab´s location (as long as cellular  
service and the vehicle’s electrical system  
are operable). An advisor will attempt to  
contact you to assess the nature of your  
emergency, and then notify the appropriate  
emergency services provider.  
(Vehicle electrical system and cellular service  
must be operable.)  
Emergency services  
Should you require emergency assistance,  
press the red emergency button and On  
Star or an advisor will contact the nearest  
emergency services provider with your  
exact location and your request for help.  
* New retail deliveries only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
OnStar - Telematics 111  
Roadside assistance**  
Hands-free communication  
The OnStar Directions &  
Connections Plan  
There’s nothing worse than being stranded  
on the road with car trouble. No matter what  
the problem is (flat tire, out of gas, or engine  
trouble), just call OnStar. They will contact  
the helpyouneed to get youquickly backon  
the road.  
Talking to an OnStar advisor is easy and  
hands-free. Simply press the OnStar but-  
ton, and a small microphone picks up your  
voice while the OnStar advisor talks to you  
through your stereo speakers. Note: Audio  
system must be switched on. You can even  
adjust the volume to your liking with the  
steering wheel controls or the radio volume  
knob. Your hands remain on the steering  
wheel, while your eyes remain on the road.  
Route support  
With OnStar Route Support, an advisor can  
help youfindyour way, no matter how far off  
course you are. You can get exact street  
directions, or guidance to nearby gas sta-  
tions, restaurants, hotels or ATMs.  
Stolen vehicle tracking  
OnStar doesn’t just protect you, it protects  
yourSaab, too. Ifyourvehicleis everstolen,  
just contact OnStar by calling  
Ride Assist  
If you need a lift, anytime of the day or night,  
just call OnStar. They’ll contact transporta-  
tion and send it right to you.  
Being safe on the road is important, but  
there’s more to life than security. There’s liv-  
ing. That’s why we have created the OnStar  
Directions and Connections Plan. It gives  
you not only the important protections of the  
Safe and Sound Plan, but also a whole  
range of serviceswhich truly changedriving  
from a chore to a luxury.  
1-888-4-ONSTAR. They will put you in  
touch with the authorities and aid them in  
locating your Saab. Ask your insurance car-  
rier about possible premium discounts.  
Information and Convenience ser-  
vices  
Accident Assist™  
OnStar advisors have access to over five  
million service listings including hotels, res-  
taurants, gas stations, dealerships, hospi-  
tals, ATMs and airports — more than 250  
service categories in all. OnStar advisors  
can even assist you with hotel and restau-  
rant reservations.  
Accident Assist™ provides step-by-step  
guidance about what to do in case of a  
crash. Working with leading insurance com-  
panies OnStar has developed a ”best prac-  
tices” list to assist you through most acci-  
dent situations. OnStar Accident Assist™  
can make the process of completing a  
police report and/or insurance claim less  
stressful.  
**There will be no charge for Roadside Assistance as  
long as your vehicle is under warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
112  
OnStar - Telematics  
Online Concierge services  
Signing Up for Personal Calling  
As an OnStar subscriber, the Personal Call-  
ing capability is already built into your  
Additional Services  
From shopping to travel to entertainment  
and more, OnStar’s online concierge can  
help you make the most of your time. Login  
to www.myonstar.com and simply select a  
city, choose a category and ask away. Get  
instant answers in a live online chat with an  
OnStar Advisor or send an E-mail if you pre-  
fer. You can also view OnStar’s recommen-  
dations for top picks in eight categories like  
dining, travel and sports and recreation.  
Personal Calling  
If you are an OnStar Safe and Sound Plan  
or Directions and Connections Plan sub-  
scriber, you have access to OnStar Per-  
sonal Calling. OnStar Personal Calling pro-  
vides you with a nationwide wireless phone  
service in your Saab that you can activate  
simply by pressing a button and using your  
voice. You can use Personal Calling in your  
Saab to place or to receive calls. The  
voice-activated system will dial the number.  
Your party will answer through your stereo  
speakers.  
With OnStar Personal Calling, you can  
enjoy the simplicity of a one-touch wireless  
connection. Whether you are placing or  
receiving a call, once you press the button,  
you never have to take your hands off the  
wheel or your eyes off the road. The ease of  
the hands-free communication service  
allows you to enjoy an even greater level of  
safety, security and convenience while driv-  
ing.  
Saab’s OnStar hardware. In order to use  
this service, an OnStar advisor must set up  
your cellular account. You must also pro-  
vide a credit card in order to establish your  
prepaid cellular account. Usage charges  
will be deducted from this prepaid account  
ofunits.” Unitsareeasily replenished using  
the credit card on file at OnStar. Once you  
signupforOnStarPersonal Calling, you will  
be given your own personal phone number  
that others can use to call into your Saab.  
To sign up for Personal Calling,  
simply  
• Press the OnStar button in your Saab.  
• Inform the advisor that you would like to  
sign up for Personal Calling.  
• The advisor will set up your account.  
You will need to provide account and  
credit card information.  
This new service is not yet available in all  
areas. Complete availability in the U.S. is  
anticipated in 2001*. For system limitations  
and details, call OnStar at  
1-800-ONSTAR-7.  
* Availability in Canada was undetermined at time of  
publication. Please contact your local dealer in Canada.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OnStar - Telematics 113  
Voice Commands  
Universal Commands  
Help– The system will provide a list of avail-  
able commands.  
Clear – When you are entering digits, this  
command will erase the last digit entered.  
To dial using a ”Nametag”:  
Personal Calling is made available through  
your voice commands to the system. This  
allows you to verbally control all of the  
phone functions.  
1 Press the  
OnStar will respond  
OnStarWhite ”Ready”  
Dot button  
Your OnStar wireless phone system has  
beenprogrammed to respondto awide vari-  
ety of voices and accents. You should  
speak distinctly in a normal speaking vol-  
ume. It is not necessary to exaggerate your  
voice or to speak loudly. Speak numerical  
digits one at a time, and then wait for confir-  
mation before going to the next digit.  
Cancel– This command takes you from the  
currentfunctiontotheReadyprompt.Ifthe  
lastresponsefromthesystemwasReady,”  
this command will exit voice recognition.  
2 Say ”CALL”  
OnStar will respond  
”Nametag Please”  
3 Say ”<stored OnStar will respond  
nametag>”  
”Calling  
<nametag>”, then  
make the call  
Placing a Call  
There are three ways to place a call:  
1 By usinga particular number, say ”DIAL”  
2 By using a stored nametag, say ”CALL”  
3 By dialing the last number, say  
”REDIAL”  
To redial the last number dialed:  
Voice Command Error Messages  
Pardon – The system has not been able to  
match your command with a word that it  
knows. Repeating the command distinctly  
should fix the problem.  
Slower Please – Repeat the command  
after a short pause. This response normally  
happens if you say a command before the  
system is ready for it orifthere is substantial  
background noise.  
1 Press the  
OnStarWhite ”Ready”  
Dot button  
OnStar will respond  
To dial a number:  
2 Say ”REDIAL” OnStar will respond  
”Redialing”, then  
1 Press the  
OnStar will respond  
OnStarWhite ”Ready”  
make the call  
Dot button  
Receiving a Call  
2 Say ”DIAL”  
OnStar will respond  
”Number Please”  
If someone calls your wireless phone num-  
ber, the entertainment system in your Saab  
will mute (if it is on), and you will hear a  
phone ringing sound. To answer the call,  
simply press the White Dot button.  
3 Say the 1st  
Digit  
OnStar will repeat the  
number  
4 Say the 2nd  
Digit  
OnStar will repeat the  
number  
Ending a Call  
Continue saying numbers in this man-  
ner until finished  
When your call is finished, press the White  
Dot button to end the call. It is not possible  
to end a call using voice commands.  
5 Say ”DIAL”  
OnStar will respond  
”Dialing <number>,”  
then make the call  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
OnStar - Telematics  
Storing/Deleting Numbers in  
Memory  
Deleting a Number from Memory  
To delete a nametag:  
Units Remaining  
OnStar keeps track of the amount of calling  
time you have purchased and used in units.  
The number of total remaining units is  
storedwithintheOnStarsystem,andcanbe  
accessed easily.  
(Nametags)  
1 Press the  
OnStarWhite  
Dot button  
OnStar will respond  
”Ready”  
Storing a number  
Your OnStar system can store up to 20  
numbers (up to 32 digits each) in memory  
that can be dialed by simply repeating the  
”nametag.”  
2 Say ”DELETE” OnStar will respond  
”Nametag Please”  
1 Press the  
OnStar will respond  
”Ready”  
OnStar White  
Dot button  
3 Say  
OnStar will respond  
To store a number:  
”<nametag>” ”Delete <nametag>,  
YES or NO”  
2 Say ”Units”  
OnStar will respond  
”Verify or Add”  
1 Press the  
OnStarWhite ”Ready”  
Dot button  
OnStar will respond  
4 Say ”YES”  
OnStar will respond  
”Deleting  
<nametag>”  
3 Say ”Verify”  
OnStar will respond  
You have # units  
remaining”  
2 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond  
”Number Please”  
Setting Tone or Voice Response  
Your system comes from the factory with  
voice responses to your commands to con-  
firm that the system received the command  
or number you intended. For example,  
when you are entering a number, OnStar  
repeats the number back to you. You may  
change the system to respond with a tone  
response if you prefer. A ready tone, a digit  
tone, oragoodbyetonewillrespondinstead  
of the voice. All other responses will still be  
by voice.  
3 Say the 1st  
Digit  
OnStar will repeat the  
number  
Adding More Calling Minutes / Units  
You can charge additional calling units with  
automatic refill by contacting OnStar, or by  
authorizing automatic unit refill on the  
OnStar subscriber website. For more infor-  
mation about the OnStar subscriber web-  
site, please see page 117.  
4 Say the 2nd  
Digit  
OnStar will repeat the  
digit  
Continue saying numbers in this manner  
until finished  
5 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond  
Automatic Replenishment  
again  
”Nametag Please”  
If you run out of units during a call, your call  
willbeterminatedandyouwillbeconnected  
to OnStar for approval to replenish. You will  
be warned at the beginning of a call when  
you have ten or fewer calling units remain-  
ing.  
6 Say ”<new  
nametag>”  
OnStar will respond  
”Again”  
7 Say ”<new  
nametag>”  
OnStar will respond  
”Once More”  
1 Press the  
OnStar will respond  
OnStarWhite ”Ready”  
8 Say ”<new  
nametag>”  
OnStar will respond  
”Storing <nametag>”  
Dot button  
2 Say ”Voice  
Feedback”  
OnStar will respond  
”Voice Feedback is  
now ON/OFF”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar - Telematics 115  
Contact OnStar  
Security/Locking your System  
You can set up a four-digit Personal Secu-  
rity Code to ensure that unauthorized  
people do not use the calling capability of  
your system. With security set to ON, the  
systemwillnotallowanypersonalcalls.You  
must turn security OFF before calls can be  
made.  
Volume Control  
The volume of the audio portion of Personal  
Calling is controlled with your steering  
wheel volume controls or with the radio  
volume knob.  
1 Press the  
OnStar  
OnStar will respond  
”Ready”  
White Dot  
button  
2 Say ”Units” OnStar will respond  
”Verify or Add”  
3 Say ”Add”  
You will be connected to  
OnStar for replenish-  
ment  
1 Press the  
OnStar will respond  
”Ready”  
OnStar White  
Dot button  
2 Say ”Security”  
OnStar will respond  
”Enter Four-Digit  
Security Code”  
You will need your OnStar Personal Identi-  
fication Number (PIN) to authorize the  
charge to your credit card on file.  
3 Say the 1st Digit OnStar will repeat  
the digit  
If you are not in your Saab, you may call an  
OnStar Advisor at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827) to request unit replenish-  
ment.  
4 Say the 2nd Digit OnStar will repeat  
the digit  
5 Say the 3rd Digit OnStar will repeat  
the digit  
6 Say the 4th Digit OnStar reply ”Secu-  
rity (code # # # #) is  
now ON/OFF”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
OnStar - Telematics  
Calling the Virtual Advisor  
1 Press the OnStar will respond  
Weather  
Virtual Advisor  
The OnStar Virtual advisor will deliver an  
up-to-date weather forecast for the current  
location of the vehicle. The forecast  
includes current temperature, daily  
high/low, tomorrow’s high/low, precipitation  
forecast, and unusual conditions.  
(expected availability fourth quarter 2000)  
Once you have activated Personal Calling,  
you can enjoy your time in your Saab even  
more with the OnStar Virtual Advisor. This  
service allows you to listen to your favorite  
news and information topics, such as  
weather reports, stock quotes and sports  
scores. You can even listen to your e-mail,  
whenever you want, without ever taking  
your eyes off the road. Using simple voice  
commands, you can browse your personal  
topics and skip or listen to those you  
choose. You can also search for additional  
information on special topics that interest  
you.  
To find out how to set up a customized pro-  
file, visit the OnStar subscriber website at  
www.onstar.com, or turn to the OnStar sub-  
scriber website section on page 31 of this  
guide. If you do not have Internet access,  
you can still take advantage of the OnStar  
Virtual Advisor services as a default profile  
will be set up for you. *  
OnStarWhite ”Ready”  
Dot button  
2 Say ”Virtual  
Advisor”  
You will be connected  
to Virtual Advisor  
Stock Quotes  
The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you  
with current quotes for the stocks you have  
specified in your customized profile as well  
as other requested stocks. All market data  
is delayed by twenty minutes. If you have  
not set your profile, you can still access the  
stock quote feature through your default  
profile and then request the stock of your  
choice.  
Getting Information from the Virtual  
Advisor  
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will prompt you  
for information you desire. These offerings  
will change to provide you with services and  
information that you and other subscribers  
want and need. The prompts are very clear  
and easy to understand and use.  
Information Available  
Sports Scores  
OnStar will continue to add new features  
and categories to the Virtual Advisor. The  
followinggeneralcategorieswillgiveyouan  
overview of the types of information avail-  
able to you. For complete up-to-date cate-  
gories, you can go to the Saab Cars USA,  
Inc. website at www.saabusa.com or the  
OnStar website at www.onstar.com, and  
then click on the link to the subscriber web-  
site.  
The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you  
with scoresfor your favoritecollegeandpro-  
fessional teams with up-to-the- minute high-  
lights, even if they are being broadcast on a  
local station. See the team selection option  
in your Mobile Profiler section of the sub-  
scriber section of OnStar.com.  
If you have not set your profile or are still  
using the default profile, you can access the  
sports option of the Virtual advisor and ask  
for an update on your favorite sport. You  
always have access to the options in the Vir-  
tual Advisor.  
*Availability in Canada was undetermined  
at the time of publication. Please contact  
your local dealer in Canada.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar - Telematics 117  
News Headlines  
OnStar Subscriber  
Website  
Limitations  
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will provide cur-  
rent headlines for many different catego-  
ries, including:  
Not withstanding anything contained  
herein, OnStar's nonperformance hereun-  
der shall be excused if caused by act or  
omission of a cellular carrier or a third-party  
service provider, equipment failure, acts of  
God, strikes, equipment or facility shortage,  
or other causes beyond OnStar’s reason-  
able control. In addition, the liability of  
OnStar, if any, for any mistake, omission,  
interruption, delay, error, defect or other fail-  
ure in the service furnished, or in the equip-  
ment used in furnishing service, shall in no  
event exceed the amount of OnStar’s  
charges to subscriber for said service  
during the period so affected, provided that  
no liability shall result for outages of 24  
hours or less.  
If you are an OnStar subscriber, you have  
access to the OnStar subscriber website.  
Thesubscriber website will provide youwith  
important facts about your OnStar subscrip-  
tion and allow you to customize your Virtual  
Advisor Mobile Profile. All this allows you to  
access up-to-the-minute information that  
canmake yourdriving experience safer and  
more enjoyable.  
• International News Headlines  
• National News Headlines  
Technology Headlines  
• Business Headlines  
• Sports Headlines  
• Entertainment Headlines  
E-mail Reader  
The subscriber website was designed to  
provide you with easy access to personal-  
ized information, learn more about OnStar,  
update your account information, plan your  
travel, receive weather information and  
interact with OnStar.  
Toaccessthesubscriberwebsite,simplygo  
to www.onstar.com, and then click on the  
OnStar subscriber link. The OnStar Sub-  
scriber website is a secured site that is  
password protected. You will be required to  
provide your OnStar account number and  
personal identification number (PIN). If you  
do not know your account number or PIN,  
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR. For  
security reasons, your PIN will be mailed to  
your address on record.  
The OnStar Virtual Advisor allows you to lis-  
ten, and soon respond, to your e-mails any  
time you want. E-mail availability is based  
on the address(es) you provide to OnStar.  
Every Virtual Advisor enrollee will receive  
an E-mail account.  
This manual includes the latest information  
at the time it was printed. We reserve the  
right to make changes to the products and  
services without prior notification.  
In order to provide you with excellent ser-  
vice, any call to the OnStar Center may be  
monitored or recorded.  
All features may not be available on all mod-  
els. Please consult your dealer for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
118  
OnStar - Telematics  
Transferring OnStar  
OnStar Operation:  
Additional Information  
OnStar uses existing emergency service  
providers and cellular and satellite technol-  
ogies. OnStar requires cellular servicetobe  
available and operating for features to func-  
tion properly.  
Because your OnStar 3-button system is an  
integralpartofyour Saab, itcannot betrans-  
ferred to another vehicle. Each OnStar  
system stays with the original car or truck in  
which it was installed.  
Warranty  
OnStariswarrantedaspartoftheSaabnew  
vehicle limited warranty.  
A Note About Privacy  
AtOnStar,weknowyouwanttoprotectyour  
privacy, and we take subscriber privacy  
very seriously. We never provide your per-  
sonal information to another company or  
person unless you authorize it, or we are  
required to by the legal process, or in such  
cases where you have provided it for billing  
purposes or you have requested a hotel res-  
ervation, are sending flowers, etc. Having  
this information on file with OnStar is a real  
advantage and helps you avoid repeating  
your credit card information over a cellular  
connection. Your trust is what we most  
value.  
The one-year OnStar prepaid subscription  
applicable to new retail deliveries cannot be  
transferred to another vehicle. However, if  
you’ve purchased additional years of ser-  
vice and decide to dispose of your Saab,  
any remaining service will be refunded to  
you. Or, if you choose, you can have it trans-  
ferred to another vehicle on your account.  
Any service that is refunded or transferred  
will be prorated at the monthly rate in effect  
at the time of transfer.  
Personal Calling:  
Existing OnStar service agreement  
required. Additional usage charges apply  
for Personal Calling. Interim 2001 model  
year availability in select markets. For  
system limitations and details, call  
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.  
Virtual Advisor:  
Existing OnStar and Personal Calling ser-  
vice agreement required. Additional usage  
charges apply for Personal Calling. Interim  
2001 model year availability in select mar-  
kets. For system limitations and details, call  
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.  
OnStar Subscription Information  
To renew your subscription or upgrade your  
plan, just push the OnStar button, or call the  
OnStar customer service department at  
1-888-864-2801 between 7 am and 12 pm  
EST Monday-Friday; 8 am and 5 pm on Sat-  
urday.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Interior equipment and trunk 119  
Interior equipment  
and trunk  
Steering wheel  
adjustment__________  
Rearview mirrors______  
Electric windows______  
Sunroof _____________  
Interior lighting _______  
Sun visors ___________  
Ashtrays_____________  
Glove compartment ___  
Cup holders__________  
Trunk _______________  
Spare wheel and tools _  
Fuel filler door________  
120  
121  
127  
128  
130  
131  
131  
132  
134  
135  
145  
146  
Opening the fuel filler  
door in an emergency_  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Steering wheel  
adjustment  
Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steer-  
ing wheel is possible.  
Pull down the lever fully until you hear a  
click.Movethesteeringwheeltothedesired  
position and then raise the lever. The lever  
should lock with a click.  
Make sure that the lever is fully locked  
before driving off.  
WARNING  
Horn  
The hornis sounded by pressing the central  
part of the steering wheel. Press closest to  
the steering wheel rim.  
Never adjust the steering wheel unless  
the car is stationary.  
To adjust the steering wheel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior equipment and trunk 121  
Adjusting the door mirrors  
1 Select mirror  
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror  
Door mirror folded in  
Button for angling passenger’s mirror  
down on reversing  
The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.  
If the car is equipped with a programmable  
driver’s seat, the settingsof the door mirrors  
can also be stored in the preset buttons for  
the seat (see page 14).  
Cars equipped with a programmable  
driver’s seat also have the ability to angle  
the passenger’s mirror down when revers-  
ing, e.g. for a better view of the curb.  
The mirrors are heated, and the heating  
comesonandgoesoffwiththerear-window  
heater.  
Rearview mirrors  
Door mirrors  
The door mirrors have auto dimming func-  
tion (option) and the passenger side door  
mirror is of the wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.  
The door mirrors are designed to fold back  
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted  
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the  
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them  
out again before driving off.  
1 Select reverse.  
2 Press the tiny button adjacent to the  
doormirror switch to tilt the mirror. The  
mirror will be reset automatically when  
reverse gear is deselected.  
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-  
ually by gently pressing the glass in the  
desired direction.  
NOTICE  
The door mirrors should be fully retracted  
before the car enters an automatic car  
wash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
122  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Interior rearview mirror with garage  
opener, autodimming and compass  
(certain variants only)  
WARNING  
Makesurethatpeopleandobjectsareout  
of the way of a moving door or gate to pre-  
vent potential harm or damage.  
When programming the garage opener,  
you may be operating a garage door or  
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to  
park outside of the garage.  
Rearview mirror  
1 Day position  
2 Night position  
Buttons for garage opener and compass  
1-3 Garage opener  
Do not use the garage opener with any  
garage door opener that lacks the safety  
stop and reverse feature as required by  
federal safety standards. (This includes  
any garage door opener model manufac-  
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage  
door opener which cannot detect an  
object, signalling the door to stop and  
reverse, does not meet current federal  
safety standards. Using a garage door  
opener without these features increases  
risk of serious injury or death.  
4 LED  
5 Compass/auto dimming ON/OFF  
6 Compass bearing  
Rearview mirror  
The rearview mirror has day/night positions  
that can be selected by means of a knob  
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day  
position.  
Retain youroriginal garage door transmitter  
for future programming procedures (i.e.,  
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested  
that upon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-  
grammed garage opener buttons beerased  
for security purposes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment and trunk 123  
Preparations for first-time programming  
transmitter should face the mirror from  
below or left side of the mirror.  
4 Simultaneously press and hold both the  
chosen and hand-held transmitter but-  
tons. Do not release the buttons until  
step 5 has been completed.  
Note: Some gate operators and garage  
door openers may require you to replace  
this Programming Step 4 with procedures  
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-  
gramming" section.  
5 After the indicator light changes from a  
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release  
both the mirror and hand-held transmit-  
ter buttons.  
6 Press and hold the just-trained button  
and observe the indicator light.  
If the indicator light stays on con-  
stantly, programming is complete  
and your device should activate when  
the button is pressed and released.  
Note: To program the remaining two but-  
tons, begin with "Programming" - step  
three. Do not repeat step two.  
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two  
seconds and then turns to a constant  
light continue with "Programming"  
steps 7-9 to complete the programming of  
a rolling code equipped device (most com-  
monly a garage door opener).  
antenna wire is attached to the  
motor-head unit.  
8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or  
"smart" button. (The name and color of  
the button may vary by manufacturer.)  
Before programming the garage opener for  
the first time, you must delete any factory  
codes.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons until  
the indicator light begins to flash-after  
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not  
holdforlongerthat 30 seconds. Thegarage  
opener is now in the train(orlearning)mode  
and can be programmed at any time begin-  
ning with "Programming" - step 2.  
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini-  
tiate step nine.  
9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,  
hold for two seconds and release the  
programmed button. Repeat the  
"press/hold/release" sequence a  
second time, and, depending on the  
brand of the garage door opener (or  
other rolling code equipped device),  
repeatthissequencea thirdtimetocom-  
plete the programming process.  
The garage opener should now activate  
your rolling code equipped device.  
Note: To program the remaining two but-  
tons, begin with "Programming" - step  
three. Do not repeat step two.  
Programming  
Thegarageopenercanrecordandstorethe  
frequencies of three different remote con-  
trols.  
The battery in the remote control should be  
fairly new for programming to work well.  
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two  
to train additional devices to a second or  
third button. Begin with "Programming" -  
step three.  
1 Turn the ignition ON.  
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons  
(buttons one and three) - releasing only  
when the indicator light begins to flash  
(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the but-  
tons for longer than 30 seconds and do  
not repeat step two to program a  
second and/or third hand-held transmit-  
ter to the remaining two buttons.  
3 Position the endof your hand-held trans-  
mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from  
the button you wish to program while  
keeping the indicator light in view. The  
7 At the garage door opener receiver  
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate  
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can  
usually be found where the hanging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
124  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming  
Reprogramming a single button  
Erasing the three buttons  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)  
after several seconds of transmission -  
which may not be long enough for the  
garage opener to pick up the signal during  
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,  
some U.S. gate operators are designed to  
"time-out" in the same manner.  
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-  
culties programming a gate operator by  
using the "Programming" procedures  
(regardless of where you live), replace  
"Programming " step 4 with the following:  
To program a device to the garage opener  
using a button previously trained, follow  
these steps:  
To erase programming from the three but-  
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased  
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined  
below), follow the step noted:  
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO  
NOT release the button.  
2 Theindicatorlightwillbegintoflashafter  
20 seconds. Without releasing the  
button, proceed with "Programming" -  
step 3.  
• Press and hold the two outer buttons until  
the indicator light begins to flash-after  
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do  
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The  
garage opener is now in the train (or  
learning) mode and can be programmed  
atanytimebeginningwith"Programming"  
- step 3.  
Note: Ifprogrammingagaragedooropener  
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the  
device during the "cycling" process to pre-  
vent possible overheating.  
4 Continue to press and hold the button  
while you press and release - every two  
seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmit-  
ter until the frequency signal has success-  
fully been accepted by the garage opener.  
(The indicator light willflash slowly and then  
rapidly.)  
Proceed with "Programming" step five to  
complete.  
NOTICE  
Switch off the power supply to the garage  
door or gate (or park the car beyond the  
range of the remote control) while  
programming using the "cycling" method  
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment and trunk 125  
Opening a garage door  
Rearview mirrors with auto dimming  
function (accessory/option)  
The autodimming is activated and deacti-  
vated with a short push on button 2.  
If the mirror is equipped with Garage Door  
Opener (option) the letter 1 is displayed on  
compass bearing display briefly when auto  
dimming is activated. When deactivating  
the letter 0 is displayed.  
To operate, simply press and release the  
programmed button. Activation will now  
occurforthetraineddevice(i.e.garagedoor  
opener, gate operator, security system,  
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).  
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter  
of the device may also be used at any time.  
The interior rearview mirror has two sen-  
sors, one forward-facing and one rear-fac-  
ing. They also activate and deactivate the  
auto dimming feature on door mirrors.  
The system is activated when the for-  
ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark  
outside and the rear-facing sensor detects.  
For example, if the car following has not  
dimmeditsheadlights.Therearviewmirrors  
arethendarkenedtopreventthestronglight  
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-  
ening is stepless.  
NOTICE  
Switch off the power supply to the garage  
door or gate (or park the car beyond the  
range of the remote control) while pro-  
gramming using the "cycling" method to  
prevent damaging the electrical motor.  
1 Forward-facing sensor  
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function  
3 Rear-facing sensor  
The mirrors return to their normal states  
when the strong light source diminishes.  
The auto dimming function can be turned  
OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe  
rear-view mirror.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
must accept any interference received, including inter-  
ference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the  
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate  
the equipment.  
NOTE  
Towing a trailer can cause the system to  
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may  
sense light from the trailer.  
Canada only:  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference, including interfer-  
ence that may cause undesired operation of this device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Compass  
The compass is integrated in the rearview  
mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in  
the top right-hand corner of the mirror and is  
updated every other second. The compass  
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,  
E, etc.  
Switch the compass display on and off by  
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds.  
Compass zones in Canada  
Compass zones in US  
Changing zones  
Calibration  
The earth’s magnetic fields vary depending  
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive  
your car from one magnetic zone to another  
thecompasssettingwillneedtobechanged  
to ensure a correct bearing.  
Calibration is performed automatically  
during travel. If an accessory, such as a  
mobile phone, is fitted and it can be  
assumed that the compass is affected, the  
compass may need to be calibrated manu-  
ally.  
1 Study the illustrations to determine the  
correct zone.  
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is  
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).  
The zone number setting now is also  
shown.  
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the  
zone number. There are 15 zones from  
which to choose. Once the correct zone  
is selected, release the button and wait  
4 seconds. The compass will now  
display the bearing.  
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and  
the compass bearing are displayed  
(approx. 9 s).  
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or  
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer  
displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment and trunk 127  
Electric windows  
WARNING  
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when the  
side windows are being wound up.  
Always remove the ignition key when  
you leave the car to prevent personal  
injury caused by the electric windows,  
for example, due to children playing.  
• The person operating the electric win-  
dows is responsible for ensuring that  
no one, especially children, has their  
head, hands or fingers in the window  
openings, before raising the windows.  
Raising the windows could otherwise  
cause serious or fatal injuries.  
1 Window switches  
2 Switch for rendering rear door window switches inoperative  
To open:  
To close:  
Front windows: press the front of the switch  
Rearwindows:Presstheback oftheswitch.  
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.  
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.  
The electric motors of the front windows are  
equipped with overload protection (inte-  
grated thermal protection). This protection  
operates when the windows are wound  
down automatically (switch pressed fully  
down).  
The switches for the front windows have a  
third position for automatic opening of the  
window.Presstheswitchfullydowntolower  
the window completely.  
To cancel automatic lowering of the win-  
dow, lift the switch briefly.  
The actuating motor will be switched off  
automatically when the window is fully  
closed or when the switch is released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Child safety: rear windows (ON/OFF)  
The window switches on the rear doors can  
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF  
switch in the panel on the center console.  
Sunroof  
(Option in Canada) (certain variants)  
When the switch is ON, the rear side win-  
dowscanbeoperatedbytheswitchoneach  
rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be  
activated.  
When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-  
dows can only be operated from the panel  
on the center console. When off, the  
switch’s back lighting will also be switched  
off.  
WARNING  
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-  
ing the sunroof.  
Always remove the ignition key when  
you leave the car to prevent personal  
injury caused by the electric sunroof,  
for example, due to children playing.  
Switch for rear side window  
• The person operating the electric sun-  
roof isresponsiblefor ensuring thatno  
one, especially children, has their  
head, hands or fingers in the opening,  
before closing the sunroof. Operating  
the sunroof could otherwise cause  
serious or fatal injuries.  
Thesunroofis operatedbytheswitchonthe  
overhead panel above the rearview mirror.  
The sunroof can be opened partially or fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior equipment and trunk 129  
1
3
2
Sunroof control  
1 To open  
Manual operation of sunroof  
2 To close  
3 Ventilation position  
Emergency operation of sunroof  
Inanemergency(e.g. ifthereisanelectrical  
failure) the sunroof can be operated by a  
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front  
of the sunroof opening, insert a screwdriver  
in the groove, and rotate.  
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-  
ual, sliding sun blind.  
To open:  
• Slide the control towards the rear to open  
the sunroof to the comfort position.  
To open it fully, slide the control back a  
second time. Press the control to stop it  
earlier.  
After the car has been waxed, the sunroof  
may squeak or squeal on opening to the  
ventilationposition. Ifthis shouldoccur, fully  
open the sunroof and, using washer fluid,  
washthe sealalong the frontedge, together  
with the paintwork that is in contact with the  
seal when the roof is closed.  
Rotate counterclockwise to close sunroof.  
To close:  
• Slidethecontrolforwardsuntilthesunroof  
is closed.  
Ventilation position  
• Press themiddleof the control(when sun-  
roof closed).  
To close: slide the control forwards.  
To fully open the sunroof from the ventila-  
tion position, slide the control back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
Interior equipment and trunk  
1
1
2
2
3
1
1 Interior lighting on continuously  
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened  
3 Lighting always off  
1 Reading lights  
2 Dome light  
• When the car is unlocked from the out-  
side.  
• When any door is opened.  
• When the ignition key is withdrawn from  
the ignition switch.  
When the switchontheoverheadpanelis in  
the mid-position, the lighting is switched off  
automatically30 seconds after the lastdoor  
has been closed or when the ignition is  
switched ON.  
There is also a light in the sun visors. The  
light comes on when the cover over the  
vanity mirror is opened.  
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been  
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting  
willbeswitchedoffautomaticallytosavethe  
battery.  
Luggage-compartment lighting  
The luggage-compartment lighting comes  
on automatically when the trunk is opened  
and goes out when the trunk is closed.  
Interior lighting  
The interior lighting consists of one dome  
light in the front and one in the back, a  
map-reading light in the front, two reading  
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the  
front (in some model variants) and door  
courtesy lights on all doors.  
The lighting will also be switched off auto-  
matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has  
been left open.  
The courtesy lights come on automatically  
when the respective door is opened. Each  
reading light has its own switch adjacent to  
the lamp.  
The switch for the dome lights is on the front  
overhead panel. When the switch is in the  
mid-position (door-activated), the interior  
lighting will come on:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior equipment and trunk 131  
1
2
Sun visor  
Front ashtray  
Rear ashtray  
1 Press soft to open/close  
2 Pull out one side at an angle  
Sun visors  
To refit, line up the slots on either side and  
slide it closed.  
Rear ashtrays  
The car is equipped with double sun visors.  
One section of the visor can be indepen-  
dently pivoted to the side window.  
Ashtrays  
(accessory)  
Open the lid to use ashtray.  
The car can be equipped with three ash-  
trays: one in the instrument panel fascia,  
andoneineachreardoor.Acigarettelighter  
is fitted adjacent to the front ashtray, and  
there is also one in the back of the center  
console.  
Avanitymirrorisprovidedonthebackofthe  
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumi-  
nated when the cover is raised.  
Toremovetheashtray, fullyopenthelidand  
lift the ashtray straight out.  
To refit the ashtray, make sure it engages  
the two square recesses in the door trim.  
Front ashtray  
1 To open the ashtray, push gently on the  
center/upper part of the front and  
release to allow it to spring out.  
2 Close the ashtray in the same way.  
Toremovetheashtray,openitandafterthat  
pull left side out at an angle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
132  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Cigarette lighters  
(accessory/certain markets only)  
Glove compartment  
1
WARNING  
The car is provided with cigarette lighters  
next to the front ashtray and in the rear end  
of the center console.  
The cigarette lighter socket can also be  
used as power point, e.g. for a mobile  
phone. The ignition should be in the ON  
position.  
The glove compartment must be closed  
while travelling. An open glove compart-  
ment door could cause leg injuries in the  
event of a crash.  
2
The glove compartment can be cooled by  
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air  
can be directed to the glove compartment  
for keeping drinks cool, etc.  
Slide the cover towards you to admit cold  
air.  
The cigarette lighter sockets can also be  
used for accessories (e.g. to charge a  
mobile phone) when the ignition is ON.  
Glove compartment.  
1 To lock  
2 To unlock  
WARNING  
Additional storage facilities are provided  
(see next page).  
The maximum combined load for the two  
cigarette lighter sockets is 240 W (20 A).  
Sliding cover in glove compartment to  
admit cold air  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior equipment and trunk 133  
In the doors  
On leading edge of front seats  
On the back of the front seats (certain  
variants only)  
Console between front seats  
Center armrest for rear seat (option)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
Interior equipment and trunk  
WARNING  
1
• The cup holder should not be used to  
holdcupsmadeofchina, glassorhard  
plasticas thesecancause injuryinthe  
event of a crash.  
• Use only for paper cups or aluminium  
cans.  
2
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot  
drinks.  
• Avoid putting oversized cups in the  
cup holder.  
Cup holder in fascia  
1 Press symbol to open  
2 Lift bottom to close  
Cup holder in rear armrest (certain vari-  
ants only)(  
Press the edge to open/close.  
NOTICE  
Cup holders  
Take care not to spill any liquid on the  
audio system when using the cup  
holders. Soft drinks in particular can  
cause malfunction.  
Cup holders are provided in the instrument  
panel fascia, in the center console compart-  
ment between the front seats, and in the  
rear-seat armrest (certain variants only).  
Cup holder in center console  
To access the cup holder in the instrument  
panel, press the symbol and release.  
To access the cup holder in the rear seat  
armrest, lower the armrest and press the  
front edge of the holder. Close in the same  
way.  
The number of cup holders provided may  
vary between models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior equipment and trunk 135  
2
Trunk  
1
3
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan  
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-  
dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are  
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.  
1 Raise the rear seatcushions by pulling theloop locatedbetween  
the cushion and the backrest.  
2 Tip the seat cushion forward.  
3 Pressthebuttonadjacenttotherespectivebackresttoreleaseit.  
4 Fold down the backrest.  
4
WARNING  
• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head  
restraint is raised and in proper position for the seats to be  
occupied.  
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.  
Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle  
• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is  
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing  
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a  
crash.  
• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts  
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent  
them from becoming trapped.  
• Check that the back rest release button (3) is flush with the  
surround before entering the rear seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
136  
Interior equipment and trunk  
WARNING  
• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller  
and lighter items on top.  
Never overload the cargo net. If the elastic breaks this may  
causepersonalinjury. Donotuseacargonetthatshowssigns  
of wear.  
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the tie down points  
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage  
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved  
in a crash (see page 137).  
• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down or the  
load-through hatch is open. Small items can also be thrown  
around inside the car and cause personal injury.  
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its  
handling characteristics (see page 270).  
• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly  
secured when folding them back to their normal position.  
Check that the button (item 3 on page 135) is flush with the  
surround before entering the back seat.  
The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during  
driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so  
that children, for example, do not burn themselves.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment and trunk 137  
Trunk pass-through hatch  
A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest  
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.  
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than  
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.  
1 Fold down the armrest.  
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.  
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and  
apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off  
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into  
gear.  
WARNING  
• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to  
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on  
hard braking.  
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its  
handling characteristics (see page 270).  
Tie Downs  
The tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place  
the load as far in as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
138  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Safety belt located  
in its belt clip  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon  
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded  
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too  
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net  
is mounted on the rear of the backrest.  
NOTICE  
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in  
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them from  
being pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.  
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For  
height adjustment refer to page 16.  
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective  
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).  
3 Raise the rear seatcushions by pulling theloop locatedbetween  
the cushion and the backrest.  
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:  
• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.  
• On edge behind the backrests of the front seats.  
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising  
the opening handle on the right-hand side.  
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the  
corresponding manner.  
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interior equipment and trunk 139  
WARNING  
• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head  
restraint is set at a suitable height for the seats to be occupied.  
• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.  
• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving  
parts of the seating.  
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always  
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the  
car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.  
• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded  
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags  
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.  
Folding the narrow section of the backrest  
The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.  
• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat  
cushions when these are raised back up.  
• If the car is equipped with a pull-out cargo net on the rear of the  
backrest, take extra care when folding the rear seat so that no  
one is injured by the net’s storage cassette on the right-hand  
side.  
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For  
height adjustment refer to page 16.  
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.  
3 Raise therearseatcushionby pullingthelooplocatedatthe rear  
of the cushion.  
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising  
the opening handle.  
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.  
NOTICE  
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in  
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being  
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see  
illustration page 138.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Load anchoring  
• Provide protection on sharp edges to  
prevent damage to the load straps.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• Never use the elastic floor net and  
elastic side net when the rear seat is  
folded down. These nets are only  
intended to keep light objects tidy, not  
for the anchoring of loads.  
• Match the speed and driving style  
according to how the car is loaded.  
The driving characteristics of the car  
can be affected because the center of  
gravity is alteredwhenthereis acargo  
in the luggage compartment.  
• Put heavy loads as low down and as  
far forward as possible in the luggage  
compartment, i.e. against the back of  
the rear seat.  
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat  
folded down when driving with a heavy  
load because the anchoring possibili-  
ties arerestrictedwhenthe rear seat is  
in this position. That the rear seat is  
in the upright position is a basic  
requirement for protection against  
cargo displacement in the event of  
a crash.  
Never overload the cargo net. If the  
elasticbreaksthismaycausepersonal  
injury. Do not use a cargo net that  
shows signs of wear.  
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-  
responds to a weight of 2200 lbs.  
(1000 kg) in a head on crash at  
32 mph (50 km/h).  
• Neverstackcargosohighthatanypart  
of the cargo lies above the edge of the  
backrest, if a cargo guard (accessory)  
is not being used.  
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and  
luggage) so that the gross vehicle  
weight or the axle weight is not  
exceeded, see page 270.  
• Cargo can intrude into the passenger  
compartment during a sudden stop or  
front crash if the outer safety belts are  
not fastened. Check that the two red  
warning-indication flags are fully  
down. This shows that the backrests  
are locked.  
• Always tie down the cargo so that it  
cannot be thrown forward during  
heavy braking or in the event of a  
crash.  
Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open, see  
page 188.  
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can  
increase the risk of injury during hard  
braking, sudden avoidance maneu-  
vers and in the event of a crash.  
• For the best load anchoring, use the  
special cargo bolts and load straps  
(accessory).  
• Load the cargo bolts evenly. Never  
attach more than one strap to each tie  
down eye.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior equipment and trunk 141  
Cargo bolts mounted on the longitudinal  
rails  
Example of cargo anchoring  
Items for load anchoring:  
Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.  
On the floor of the luggage compartment  
there are two longitudinal aluminium rails  
(CargoTracks™) where special cargo bolts  
can be mounted.  
The cargo bolts are mounted by lifting their  
locks and inserting them into the rail. Each  
cargobolt is movedinthefollowingway: pull  
up its lock and at the same time move it for-  
ward or backward to the desired position.  
The side netting should be attached to the  
two tie down eyes which are included in the  
accessory kit and to two of the eyes  
mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™  
on the floor.  
Thecargobolts, loadstraps andelastic nets  
are stored in the two floor lockers on the  
right- and left-hand side of the luggage com-  
partment. The lockers are opened by lifting  
the respective fabric loop.  
• Cargo bolts (accessory).  
• Special load straps (accessory).  
Items to keep light objects tidy (accesso-  
ries):  
• Elastic floor cargo net.  
• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand  
side of the luggage compartment.  
The elastic nets may only be used to keep  
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.  
The floor net should be attached to the  
cargo bolts that are mounted on the Car-  
goTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as far  
forward and as far back as possible on the  
CargoTracks™.  
NOTICE  
Do not place any objects so that the  
demisting and antenna elements on the  
inside of the window could be damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
Interior equipment and trunk  
WARNING  
• The cargo in the luggage compart-  
ment must be anchored properly,  
even if the cargo net is correctly in  
position. The only purpose of thenet is  
to prevent light objects from being  
thrownaboutinthecabinduringheavy  
braking or in the event of a crash.  
• Take extra care when tipping the wide  
section of the rear seat forwards if the  
car has a pull-out cargo net on the rear  
of the backrest. Makesure that no one  
is injured by the cargo net’s storage  
cassette on the right-hand side where  
the backrest is already folded.  
Cover over the fixing point for the cargo  
net  
Attaching the cargo net to the roof  
Hooks on the net’s storage cassette  
Cargo net (accessory)  
The pull-out cargo net’s storage cassette is  
mounted on the rear of the backrest.  
The pull-out cargo net can also be used  
when the whole rear seat is folded. There  
are two front attachment points in the roof  
for this purpose.  
Removing the cargo net storage cas-  
sette  
1 Remove the covers near the two rear  
fixingpointsintheroof. Carefullybendin  
the lower edge of the cover with a screw-  
driver.  
2 Pull the cargo net out directly back-  
wards.  
1 Fold down the entire rear seat (see  
page 138).  
2 Push the cassette to the right.  
3 Snap the net’s twofasteners into the two  
fixing points on the roof.  
4 Make sure that the hooks on the net’s  
own storage cassette fit against the net  
mesh.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment and trunk 143  
Sliding floor (accessory)  
WARNING  
To avoid personal injury take note of the  
following:  
• Do not leave children unsupervised  
when the sliding floor is drawn out.  
• Be aware of the risk of pinching when  
handling the sliding floor.  
• Never drive the car with the sliding  
floor pulled out.  
Setting up the sliding floor  
• Always use the car’s regular cargo  
anchoring when transporting a cargo.  
Thefunctionoftheslidingflooris tofacilitate  
loading and unloading.  
Securing loads, see page 137.  
When the car is parked and the floor is  
pulled out, it can bear the weight of two  
people (maximum 440 lbs./200 kg).  
Setting up  
1 Lift up the floor.  
2 Fold out the support wheels.  
3 Set the floor down on the support  
wheels.  
• Provide protection on sharp edges to  
prevent damage to the anchoring  
straps.  
• The sliding floor must not be changed  
or modified in any way.  
• Puttheslidingfloorinthefolded-down  
position when it is not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Loading  
Folding down the sliding floor  
Trunk Release Handle  
Loading/Unloading  
When the floor is not in use  
Trunk Release Handle  
1 Lift the handle and pull out the sliding  
floor to the outer locking position. Make  
sure that the floor is locked correctly.  
2 Put on the cargo, but make sure that it  
does not cover the handle.  
1 Lift up the floor.  
2 Fold down the support wheels.  
3 Laydowntheslidingfloorandmakesure  
that it is locked in its lower position.  
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release  
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.  
This handle will glow following exposure to  
light. Pull the release handle down to open  
the trunk from the inside.  
3 Lift the handle and push in the floor to  
the inner locking position. Make sure  
that the floor is locked correctly.  
NOTICE  
4 Tie down the load with Saab’s load  
straps according to the instructions, see  
page 140.  
The trunk release handle was not  
designed to be used to tie down the trunk  
lid or as a an anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk. Improper use of the  
trunk release could damage it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment and trunk 145  
Stowage of spare wheel and tools under  
trunk floor  
Jack location, between spare wheel and  
sill  
Spare wheel and tools  
WARNING  
The spare wheel, together with the jack and  
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye  
and toolkit, are stowed away underneath  
the trunk. There is also room for a spare  
bulb kit (accessory).  
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so  
that they cannot get loose and cause  
injury in the event of a crash.  
Driving considerations with compact spare  
wheel/tire fitted, see page 187.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
146  
Interior equipment and trunk  
Button for releasing filler door  
To open fuel filler door in an emergency  
9-5 Sedan  
To open filler door in an emergency,  
9-5 Wagon  
9-5 Wagon:  
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 229).  
On the right-hand side of the luggage com-  
partment, inthestoragelocker, is athinwire  
that is tied to the locking arm of the filler  
door. To open the door pull the yellow plas-  
tic arrow attached to the end of the wire.  
Fuel filler door  
Opening the fuel filler  
door in an emergency  
(certain variants only)  
The fuel filler door is opened by means of a  
button on the driver’s door. The door is  
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-  
ically when released.  
(certain variants only)  
If the fuel filler door fails to open after the  
button on the driver’s door has been  
pressed, it can be opened manually from  
inside the trunk.  
Refueling, see page 154.  
9-5 Sedan:  
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 229).  
A thin cable on the right-hand side in the  
trunk is connected to the catch for the filler  
door. To open the door, pull the yellow plas-  
tic arrow on the end of the cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting and driving 147  
Starting and driving  
Economical motoring __  
Driving in cold weather_  
Driving in hot weather _  
Towing a trailer _______  
174  
176  
177  
178  
Driving with the trunk  
Ignition switch ________ 148  
Starting the engine ____ 149  
lid/tailgate open______  
Driving in deep water __  
Towing the car________  
Jump starting ________  
188  
188  
188  
191  
Important considerations  
for driving___________ 151  
Driving with a roof rack  
load________________  
Refueling ____________ 154  
Engine Break-In Period_ 157  
Gear changing ________ 158  
Cruise control ________ 167  
Braking ______________ 168  
183  
185  
185  
Saab Parking Assistance 194  
Driving at night _______  
Driving with a load ____  
Parking brake ________  
Parking______________  
196  
196  
Driving considerations  
with compact spare  
wheel/tire fitted ______  
Traction Control System  
Electronic Stability  
171  
187  
Program (ESP) _______ 172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
Starting and driving  
F
LOCK position  
Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.  
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.  
The gear lever is locked. This is the only position in which the key can be  
removed.  
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting all work.  
F
F
OFF position  
Gear lever no longer locked.  
Certain electrical circuits operational  
ON position  
Ignition switch  
All electrical circuits working. Do not leave the key in the ON position  
when the engine is not running. Turn the key to OFF to switch off the  
electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights  
come on as a check, and they normally are extinguished after about  
3 seconds.  
The combined ignition switch and  
gear-lever lock is located in the center con-  
sole between the front seats. The ignition  
key can only be removed when reverse is  
engaged (automatic transmission: selector  
in ”P” position).  
ST (starter) position  
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key  
number is specified on the small plastic  
strap that comes with the keys when the car  
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number  
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if  
ordering a replacement key.  
The starter operates when the key is turned to this position. When  
released, the key will spring back to the ON position. If the engine fails to  
start, the key must first be turned back to the position between OFF and  
LOCK before the starter can be operated again.  
When the starter motor is running, several electrical circuits are  
disconnected to facilitate starting.  
See also page 40.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 149  
If the car does not start  
Starting the engine  
If the text ”Key not accepted. Contact ser-  
vice.isshownontheSID,afterafailedstart  
attempt, the cause could be a fault in the  
transmitter in the key, or in the receiver in  
the ignition lock. The following should be  
done:  
NOTICE  
WARNING  
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop  
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or  
liquid gets into it, the switch may not  
operate properly.  
• When starting the engine:  
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.  
Turn the key back to the LOCK position.  
Turn the key to ON.  
• Press one of the buttons on the remote  
control (the LED stops blinking).  
• Start the engine.  
Try another key. If this works, then the fault  
is in the first key.  
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for  
checking and rectification.  
Note:  
- Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the  
gear lever is not in the neutral posi-  
tion, the clutch pedal must be fully  
depressed or the car will jump for-  
wards or backwards, which may  
cause a crash.  
WARNING  
• Always remove the key before leaving  
the car.  
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore  
removing the ignition key.  
- Never start the car from outside the  
vehicle, e.g. through a wound down  
window. This could lead to serious  
personal injury.  
Certain electronic items, such as cellular  
phones, may affect the starting produce-  
dure. Besurethatalldevicesareclearofthe  
key/ignition switch area.  
• Engage reverse (R) (position P for  
automatictransmission)toremovethe  
ignition key. The key can only be  
removed in this gear position.  
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,  
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to  
the danger of CO – always open the  
garage doors before starting the  
engine in the garage.  
• There is also a danger of CO poison-  
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
150  
Starting and driving  
Cars with automatic transmission  
Starting the engine  
• The tail pipe of the exhaust system  
can become very hot during driving.  
Bear this in mind when loading and  
unloading the car.  
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy  
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive  
away as soon as the oil warning light has  
been extinguished to enable the engine to  
attain its normal temperature as quickly as  
possible.  
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N  
position.  
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.  
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key  
spring back as soon as the engine has  
startedandisrunningsmoothlyatvery  
low temperatures, you may need to run  
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait  
20–30 seconds before running the  
starter again, to give the battery time to  
recover.  
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when  
parked with the engine running. There  
is a risk of depressing the accelerator  
which could lead to engine damage.  
The engine has an automatic choke and  
should be started as follows:  
Cars with manual transmission  
To start theenginetheclutch pedalmust  
be fully depressed.  
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating  
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter  
change, or if the car has been stored for  
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic  
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which  
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-  
ing. Although this is quite normal and does  
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable  
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise  
has disappeared.  
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely  
service free; the valve clearance is set up at  
the factory and will not need any subse-  
quent adjustment.  
Lettheengineidleforabout10 seconds. Do  
not open the throttle wide for at least  
2–3 minutes after starting.  
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not  
touch the accelerator.  
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key  
spring back as soon as the engine has  
startedandisrunningsmoothlyatvery  
low temperatures, you may need to run  
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait  
20–30 seconds before running the  
starter again, to give the battery time to  
recover.  
Useful tips on cold climate starting  
If the engine has failed to start after several  
attempts in very cold weather, press and  
hold the accelerator down to the floor and  
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will  
prevent the engine being flooded (exces-  
sively rich fuel-air mixture).  
Now start the engine in the normal way – do  
not touch the accelerator.  
Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting  
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),  
donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting  
the engine.  
Note:  
On cars with manual transmission, if the  
starter fails to engage when the ignition key  
is turned to the start position, make sure the  
clutch pedal is full depressed. Misposi-  
tioned floor mats or other obstructions  
under the clutch pedal may affect starting.  
Lettheengineidleforabout10 seconds.Do  
not open the throttle wide for at least 2–  
3 minutes after starting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 151  
Limp-home mode  
Important  
The engine management system has a  
diagnostic feature that continually checks a  
numberofinternalfunctions. If,forexample,  
a fault is detected in the throttle valve, the  
engine management system will go into  
Limp-home mode.This limits idling control,  
disables the cruise-control system and  
limits the capacity of the A/C compressor.  
NOTICE  
considerations for  
driving  
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light  
starts to flash, ease off the accelerator  
slightly. If the light does not cease to flash  
within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suit-  
able place as soon as possible and turn  
off the engine. The car must be towed to  
an authorized Saab dealer.  
The engine-management system in the  
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The  
system manages the ignition, fuel injection  
and turbo boost pressure.  
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab  
is an intelligent engine-management  
system designed to achieve optimum driv-  
ability under differing driving conditions.  
The system makes adjustments automati-  
cally, for instance, if the car is being driven  
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for differ-  
ent grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for dif-  
ferent load conditions.  
If the limp-home mode is in operation  
(”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”  
light on, see below) and the outside temper-  
ature is close to or below freezing, you may  
need to use some throttle on starting (some  
pressure on the accelerator).  
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault  
in the engine-management system, the  
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”  
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light  
flashes, it indicates that the engine is mis-  
firing which can result in damage to the  
catalytic converter.  
1 Starting and driving  
light  
on the main instrument panel will  
come on (see page 57), indicating that you  
should have the car checked as soon as  
possible by an authorized Saab dealer.  
• Refrain from using full throttle before  
the engine has warmed up (before  
needle in mid-range on temperature  
gauge).  
• A safety function prevents the engine  
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by  
limiting the induction air.  
2 Stopping the engine  
• Do not rev the engine immediately  
before switching it off – stop the engine  
when it is idling.  
3 Regulating the boost pressure  
• The system is optimizedfor fuel with an  
octanerating ofAON 90. The 2.3 Turbo  
and 2.3 T are optimized for AON 93.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
152  
Starting and driving  
One of the advantages of the system is  
that it enables the engine to be run  
safelyonlower-gradefuel,althoughnot  
lower than AON 87.  
• The maximum boost pressure is  
adjusted automatically to the knocking  
or pinging tendency of the engine.  
Occasional, short-lived knocking when  
the engine is under a heavy load is per-  
fectly normal; the extent will depend on  
the grade of fuel in the tank.  
• Isolated instances of knocking are  
more likely to occur with low-octane  
fuel. This controlled form of knocking,  
followed by a reduction in the boost  
pressure, isasignthatthe wastegate is  
functioning and is perfectly safe for the  
engine.  
Important considerations with cata-  
lytic converters  
WARNING  
If the engine is being run with the car on a  
rolling road or dynamometer, longer than  
for a standard state emission inspection,  
to ensure adequate cooling, air must be  
blown into the engine compartment and  
under the car at a rate equivalent to the  
ram-air effect that would be obtained at  
the corresponding road speed.  
NOTICE  
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gas-  
oline is detrimental to the catalyst and  
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair  
the function of the catalytic converter.  
The catalytic converter is an emission-con-  
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust  
system. It consists of a metal canister with a  
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have  
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of  
precious metals).  
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-  
tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid  
damage to the converter and its associated  
components, the following points must be  
observed:  
NOTICE  
• If the engine sounds strange there is a  
fault in the system. Have the car  
checked without delay by an autho-  
rized Saab dealer.  
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-  
dance with the service program. The fuel  
and ignition systems are particularly  
important in this context.  
• The use of fuel with too low an octane  
rating can cause serious engine dam-  
age.  
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the  
engine (not running on all cylinders) and  
any loss of power or performance. At the  
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed  
and take the car to an authorized Saab  
dealer as soon as possible.  
• If the engine fails to start (in very cold  
weatherorifthebatteryisflat),thecarcan  
be push started (manual gearbox only) or  
started using jumper cables to a donor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 153  
• Never park the car on dry grass or other  
combustible material. The catalytic con-  
verter gets very hot and could therefore  
start a fire.  
1
2
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.  
• If you jump start the car when the engine  
is already up to normal temperature, the  
engine must start to run on all cylinders.  
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to  
start immediately.  
3
3
2
NOTICE  
Button for releasing filler flap  
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for  
air to get into the fuel system. If this  
happens, the catalytic converter may  
overheat and be damaged.  
Oxygen-sensor-controlled  
injection system  
1 Engine control module  
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)  
3 Catalytic converters  
Fuel filler flap  
(certain variants only)  
The fuel filler flap is opened by means of a  
button on the driver’s door. The flap is  
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-  
ically when released.  
Failure to follow these directions could  
result in the catalytic converter and associ-  
ated components being damaged, and  
could represent a breach of the warranty  
conditions.  
battery. However, as soon as you have  
started the engine, it is important that it  
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow  
it to idle for up to five minutes to give it time  
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this  
time, the engine still fails to run properly,  
turn off the engine and get in touch with  
an authorized Saab dealer for advice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Starting and driving  
Only fuel from well-known oil companies  
should be used.  
All Saab gasoline engines can be driven on  
fuel of grade AON 87–93.  
For optimum performance we recommend:  
AON 90 for 2.3t  
NOTICE  
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come  
right up the filler pipe as expansion  
room is needed.  
• The use of fuel with too low an octane  
rating can cause serious engine dam-  
age.  
AON 93 for 2.3Turbo and 2.3T, (see page  
272).  
If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is  
used, the following restrictions apply:  
Methanol: max. 5 % by volume.  
Ethanol: max. 10 % by volume.  
MTBE: max. 15 % by volume.  
Fuel-tank capacity: 18.5 US gal. (70 liters)  
Screwonthefillercapandkeepturninguntil  
it has clicked at least three times.  
The most effective way to prevent conden-  
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid  
possible running problems) is to keep the  
tank well filled.  
Beforetheonsetoffreezingtemperaturesin  
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline  
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel  
any condensation in the system.  
The fuel filler cap is located in the right rear  
quarter panel.  
Refueling:  
Refueling  
WARNING  
1 Switch off engine.  
2 Open fuel door  
3 Insert the fuel-pump nozzle beyond the  
flange on the filler pipe. Do not withdraw  
the nozzle while fueling is in progress.  
• Never use fuel for any purpose other  
than as engine fuel.  
• Fuel is highly flammable and can  
cause severe burns. Never use an  
exposed flame in the vicinity of gaso-  
line. Never smoke when filling the  
vehicle up with fuel.  
4 Stop refueling the first time the pump  
turns off, indicating the tank is full.  
• Do not use the phone when refueling.  
Gasoline fuels are highly explosive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting and driving 155  
blending percentages are met by such  
fuels:  
Recommended fuel:  
The engine in your Saab 9-5 is designed to  
operate on unleaded gasoline that has an  
octane rating of 87 or higher. Octane rating  
is determined according to the formula:  
NOTICE  
• Up to 10 % ethanol by volume, with corro-  
sion inhibitors.  
• Up to 15 % MTBE by volume (methyl ter-  
tiary butyl ether).  
• Up to 5 % methanol by volume, with an  
equal amountofasuitable co-solvent and  
added corrosion inhibitors.  
Other, less common, fuel additives used by  
some gasoline dealers are also acceptable,  
provided that the resultant gasoline is not  
more than 2.7 % oxygen by weight.  
SomeCanadianandU.S. gasolinescontain  
an octane enhancing additive called meth-  
lycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission  
control system performance may deterio-  
rate and the malfunction indicator lamp on  
your instrument panel may turn on. If this  
occurs, return to your authorized Saab  
dealer for service.  
However, these blended gasolines are reg-  
ulated and should never exceed these rec-  
ommended blend percentages and service  
station operators should know if their gaso-  
lines contain detergents and oxygenates,  
and have been reformulated to reduce vehi-  
cle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to  
noticeaproblemwiththewayyourcarstarts  
or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try  
a different brand of gasoline.  
• Fill to maximum filling capacity  
• Stop filling after the first time that the  
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.  
MON + RON  
2
• Filling capacity can differ between  
different fuel stations and outside  
temperature. Fueltankvolumewhen  
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by  
0.5 gal. (2 liters).  
where MON is the Motor Octane Number,  
and RON is the Research Octane Number.  
The average of these two values is the  
octane rating of the gasoline as it appears  
on the pump at a retail gas station. This  
value is sometimes referred to as the  
"Anti-Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average  
Octane Number" (AON).  
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler  
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed  
roomfor expansionespeciallyduring  
hot weather.  
Openingthefuelfillerdoorinanemergency,  
see page 146.  
To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injec-  
tors which can cause poor driveability, use  
only quality gasolines that contain deter-  
gents and corrosion inhibitors. Because  
gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in  
their composition and quality, you should  
switch to a different brand if you begin expe-  
riencing driveability and/or hard starting  
problems shortly after refueling your car. In  
recent years, a variety of fuel additives and  
alcohols or oxygenates have been blended  
withgasoline.Thesetypesofgasolinesmay  
befound inallpartsoftheUnitedStatesand  
Canada, but particularly in geographic  
areas and cities that have high carbon mon-  
oxidelevels. Saabapproves theuseofsuch  
"reformulated" gasolines in its products,  
which help in reducing pollution from all  
motor vehicles, provided that the following  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
Starting and driving  
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)  
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87  
octane or higher. Use of gasoline with an  
octane rating lower than 87 can result in  
severeenginedamage. Damagecausedby  
incorrect fuel being used is not covered  
under the terms of the New Car Warranty  
and will be the responsibility of the owner. It  
is recommended that the gasoline meet  
specifications which were developed by the  
American Automobile Manufacturers Asso-  
ciation (AAMA) and endorsed by the Cana-  
dian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Associa-  
tion for better vehicle performance and  
engine protection. Gasolines meeting the  
AAMAspecificationcouldprovideimproved  
driveability and emission control system  
performance compared to other gasolines.  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
Higher concentrations of methanol than  
listed above, or the use of methanol-  
blended gasoline without suitable  
co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,  
can damage your car’s fuel system,  
leading to the need for repairs which are  
not covered by Saab’s productwarranty.  
The engine control module (ECM) mon-  
itoring the engine parameters also  
stores fault codes.  
Under certain circumstances, this may  
cause constant illumination of the  
”Engine malfunction (CHECK  
ENGINE)” lamp  
fault that must be checked by your Saab  
dealer, see page 57.  
, thus indicating a  
NOTE:alwaysobservethefollowingtwo  
measures:  
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is  
screwed on correctly before the  
engine is started. Screw on the fuel  
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct  
clicks.  
In Canada, look for the  
”Auto Makers’ Choice” label  
on the fuel pump.  
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level  
indicator illuminated. The symbol  
illuminates when less than approxi-  
mately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel  
remains in the tank.  
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If  
the octane is less than 87, you may get a  
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s  
bad enough, it can damage your engine. If  
you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or  
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your  
engine needs service. But don’t worry if you  
hear alittlepingingnoisewhen you’re accel-  
erating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,  
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane  
fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, con-  
stant knock thatmeans you have a problem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 157  
If your vehicle is certified to meet California  
Emission Standards (indicated on the  
underhood emission control label), it is  
designed to operate on fuels that meet Cali-  
fornia specifications. If such fuels are not  
available in states adopting California emis-  
sions standards, your vehicle will operate  
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal spec-  
ifications, but emission control system per-  
formance may be affected. The ”Engine  
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” indicator  
on your main instrument panel may turn on  
and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check  
test. See ”Engine malfunction (CHECK  
ENGINE)” indicator on page 57. If this  
occurs, return to your authorized Saab  
dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause  
of failure. In the event it is determined that  
the causeofthecondition is thetypeof fuels  
used, repairs may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated  
for low emissions may contain an  
Engine Break-In Period  
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to  
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.  
octane-enhancing additive called methylcy-  
clopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT); ask your service station operator  
whether or not the fuel contains MMT. Saab  
Automobile AB does not recommend the  
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing  
MMT are used, spark plug life may be  
reduced and your emission control system  
performance may be affected. The malfunc-  
tionindicator lamp onyourinstrument panel  
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your  
authorized Saab dealer for service.  
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-  
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-  
ble and the life of the engine will be short-  
ened.  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do  
not exceed 5,000 rpm.  
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full  
throttle, other than for brief instances,  
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).  
Wearing in new brake pads  
New brake pads take time to bed in, about  
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely  
under stop-and-go conditions or about  
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.  
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid  
hard braking as much as possible during  
this period.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
158  
Starting and driving  
Gear changing  
3
4
Manual transmission  
1
2
5
Tostartthe engine the clutchpedal must  
be fully depressed.  
R
The gear positions are marked on the gear  
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,  
you must lift the ring underneath the  
gear-lever knob.  
To change gear, fully depress the clutch  
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is  
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting  
on the gear lever, as this can increase the  
wear on the transmission.  
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear,  
ease the gear lever straight back, without  
applying any lateral pressure. This will pre-  
vent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,  
which can result in overreving and possible  
damage to the engine.  
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is  
at a standstill, release the accelerator and  
fullydepresstheclutch. From neutral, press  
the gear lever firmly to the right before  
easing it back into reverse.  
NOTICE  
When the reverse gear is to be engaged  
the car must be at a standstill with the  
accelerator fully released. Lift thereverse  
lock-out collar and push the gear lever  
firmly to the right in neutral before easing  
it into reverse.  
Towing  
Towing of cars with manual transmission,  
see page 188.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 159  
Automatic transmission  
WARNING  
• Make ita habitto keepyour foot onthe  
brake when selecting a drive position,  
to prevent the car from creeping for-  
ward (or backward if reverse is  
selected).  
• The car must be at a standstill before  
P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave  
your foot on the brake pedal to move  
the lever out of P. If the car is still  
moving when a drive position is subse-  
quently selected, this could cause a  
crash or damage the automatic trans-  
mission.  
Selector lever  
Selector-lever indicator on main instru-  
ment panel  
The electronic control module for the auto-  
matic transmission receives information on  
engine torque and road speed, and also  
controls the hydraulic pressure in the trans-  
mission to ensure that gear changing is as  
smooth as possible.  
When the car is stationary, the engine must  
be at idling speed when the selector lever is  
moved.  
You must have your foot on the brake  
pedal to move the lever out of park.  
• Never park the car with the selector  
lever in a drive position, even if the  
parking brake is on.  
• If you want to leave the car with the  
engine running, move the selector  
lever to P or N and apply the parking  
brake.  
If the accelerator is depressed while the  
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal  
wear in the transmission.  
The position of the selector lever is shown  
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and  
also by an indicator on the main instrument  
panel. If manual mode (M) is selected, the  
current gear is also displayed on the main  
instrument panel.  
NOTICE  
The ignition key can only be removed when  
the selector lever is in the P position.  
After selecting a drive position, pause  
brieflytoallow thegear toengage(thecar  
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-  
ate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
Starting and driving  
Four modes for the automatic transmission  
canbeselected:Normal,Manual, Sportand  
Winter.  
TheNormalmode, whichprovidesthebest  
fuel economy, is the default setting when  
the engine is started.  
Lock-up function  
The automatic transmission has a lock-up  
function, which can render the torque con-  
verter inoperative in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears,  
thus reducing the engine speed and fuel  
consumption.  
When the lock-up function comes into oper-  
ation, it may give the impression of an over-  
drive being engaged.  
Manual mode (Sentronic): see page 163.  
When the Sport mode is selected, the  
throttle angle is altered to provide more  
power at the same throttle setting. The  
transmission also changes up later than in  
Normal mode to provide higher perfor-  
mance. In this mode, the SPORT indicator  
will appear on the main instrument panel  
(see page 166).  
The Winter mode is intended for use when  
pulling away and driving onicy roads. In this  
mode, thetransmissionstarts in3rdgear, to  
provide better grip, and the WINTER indica-  
tor appears on the main instrument panel.  
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the auto-  
matic transmission will automatically revert  
to Normal mode (see page 166).  
Kick-down  
Whentheacceleratorispresseddownhard,  
a change-down to the next gear will be  
effected to provide maximum acceleration,  
e.g. for overtaking.  
Detent positions for selector movement  
Following this, the next higher gear will be  
selected at the optimum engine speed for  
acceleration or, if you ease off the acceler-  
ator, before reaching this.  
The detent button on the selector lever has  
to be pressed before the selector can be  
moved between certain positions.  
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a trans-  
mission function in the Normal and Sport  
modes which matches gear changing to  
currentdrivingconditions.Thetransmission  
control module senses the load on the  
engine and temperature of the transmis-  
sion. A suitable gear change pattern is then  
selected automatically to avoid unneces-  
sary gear changes and undesired tempera-  
ture increases in the transmission.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 161  
Shift Lock override  
NOTICE  
Automatic transmission,  
fault indicator  
If ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”  
light appears on the main instrument panel,  
the system has detected a fault in the auto-  
matic transmission or its control module  
(see page 59).  
This also means that the Limp-home mode  
has been selected, to guard against further  
damage being done to the transmission. In  
this mode, the automatic transmission  
starts in 5th gear, and gear changes (if nec-  
essary) will have to be made manually.  
Stop the car in a safe place. Switch off then  
restart the engine. If the fault is intermittent,  
the transmission will operate as normal  
despite the fault indicator being on. Have  
the car checked at an authorized Saab  
dealer.  
It is not possible to select the SPORT,  
WINTER or Sentronic mode when the  
Limp-home mode is active.  
Due to electrical problems it may not be  
possible to move the selector out of the  
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If  
for some reason the selector has to be  
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow  
the car a short distance) do as described  
below.  
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 229). If the  
problem was cured by changing the fuse or  
battery, you do not have to contact a Saab  
dealer.  
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift  
Lockfeatureis activated youshould contact  
your Saab dealer.  
Park Brake Shift lock  
The transmission has a security function  
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move  
the gear selector out of the P position, the  
brakepedalmust bedepressedat the same  
time as the gear selector catch (detente) is  
pressed in.  
IfthefuseisOK, checkthebatteryregarding  
the voltage.  
1 Apply the parking brake  
2 Make sure the key is in position ON  
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver  
and push the lever (see picture) down-  
wards so that the detent button can be  
pressed approx. 10 mm  
Gear changes must be made manually.  
The following gears will be engaged in the  
respectiveselector positions when the auto-  
matic transmission is in Limp-home mode:  
4 Move the selector out of position P to N  
5 Remove the tool  
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to  
be moved immediately; otherwise keep  
it applied  
Position  
Gear  
R
D
M
L
Reverse 5th  
5th  
2nd  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
162  
Starting and driving  
Overheated transmission fluid  
If the automatic-transmission fluid should  
overheat,thefollowingmessagewillappear  
on the SID:  
”Gearbox too hot. Make a safe stop.”. In this  
event, stop the car in a suitable place,  
switch off the engine and open the hood.  
Wait for several minutes then turn on the  
ignitionto check that the messagehas gone  
out. When driving subsequent to the trans-  
mission fluid overheating, select a gear in  
which the engine speed is about 3,000 rpm.  
Overheating of the automatic-transmission  
fluid can occur when the car is towing a  
heavyload, suchas a camping trailer in hilly  
country. High ambient temperatures can  
also increase the temperature of the trans-  
mission fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty.  
Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see  
also page 178).  
Driving on hilly roads with a heavy  
load  
NOTICE  
The transmission fluid can overheat when  
the gearbox is strained, for example, when  
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid  
the transmission fluid overheating, always  
drive in Normal mode. The adaptive gear  
change patterns are then active.  
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler  
can also cause the transmission fluid to  
overheat. Overheating reduces the service  
life of the fluid. Contact an authorized Saab  
dealer (see also page 178).  
If the control module has actuated the  
Limp-home function for the automatic  
transmission, the car will remain in 5th  
gear when D is selected, making it very  
sluggish.  
Select position L to prevent unnecessary  
wear on the transmission. The transmis-  
sion then starts in 2nd gear. Once the car  
is moving you can select position D.  
When the indicator light is on, the car  
must not be driven with a caravan or  
trailer attached.  
WARNING  
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-  
tor position D or L) to spare the brakes  
when you are driving on a long or steep  
downhill slope.  
Brake failure can result from overheated  
brakes!  
Towing  
Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,  
see page 188.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 163  
Descending hills  
Sentronic, manual mode  
Move the selector lever to the M position.  
Select a higher gear by flicking the  
If the speed of the car increases while  
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-  
ator being released, the control module will  
change down a gear when you brake. If you  
desire more powerful engine braking, man-  
ually select a lower gear.  
right-hand paddle  
towards you. Select  
a lower gear by flicking the left-hand paddle  
towards you.  
An example of when you may wish to make  
manualgearchangesiswhenovertaking,to  
enable you to remain in a low gear for an  
extended period of time.  
Changes from 3rd to 4th and from 4th to 5th  
can be made when the engine speed is  
above roughly 2,000 rpm.  
If youselecta gearthat is judgedtoohighby  
the system, the selected gear position will  
be shown briefly on the main instrument  
panel and then the gear that is actually  
engaged.  
Paddles on the steering wheel for  
changing gear manually  
When the selector lever is in the M position,  
as opposed to the D position, gas engines  
are much more responsive to changes in  
accelerator position. The accelerator has a  
different feel.  
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish  
to pull off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of  
wheel spin.  
When descending hills you should select a  
lowgeartoincreasethebrakingeffectof the  
engine and thus spare the brakes.  
Manual gear selections are shown on the  
main instrument panel. The selector posi-  
tion and the current gear are displayed.  
When in manual mode, kick-down operates  
for 4th and 5th gears (below 2,000 rpm).  
Kick-downcannotbeactivatedin1st,2ndor  
3rd gears.  
For optimum performance, gear changes  
should be made before reaching 6,000 rpm.  
To avoid damaging the engine and trans-  
mission, thetransmissionwillshiftupa gear  
iftheengineisindangerofoverrevving.You  
may feel aslight jolt before this gear change  
is effected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164  
Starting and driving  
Selector positions  
P
D
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal  
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 5th  
will take place automatically, the timing of which  
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) posi-  
tion and the speed of the car.  
To shift out of the P position you must  
depress the brake pedal and the ignition  
must be ON.  
The parking position (P) must only be selected  
when the car is at a complete standstill. The  
selector lever is locked and the transmission is  
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the  
parking brake after parking the car.  
The engine can be started. The key can be  
removed.  
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to  
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).  
M
Move the selector lever from position D to M to  
allow you to change gear manually. Refer to  
page 163.  
R
The reverse (R) position must only be selected  
when the car is at a complete standstill. The  
detent-release button must be pressed before  
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until  
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)  
before touching the accelerator.  
L
Select position L if you wish to drive in 1st gear.  
No upchanges will be made if you pull off in posi-  
tion L. If you move the selector lever from posi-  
tion D or M to L at a high vehicle speed, the  
transmission will automatically shift down  
through 4th, 3rd and 2nd gears to 1st gear,  
depending on the car’s speed. Use this position  
for descending steep hills if the car is heavily  
loaded to spare the brakes.  
N
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is  
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be  
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is  
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpect-  
edly.  
To prevent the engine and transmission from  
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for  
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traf-  
fic jam.  
The normal drive position (D) is recommended  
for waiting at traffic lights.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 165  
If you move the selector lever from D to L, downchanges will follow  
a set pattern to avoid damaging the engine or transmission.  
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.  
If one of the drive wheels spins excessively, the engine torque will  
be reduced to avoid damaging the transmission.  
Adaptive gear-change patterns  
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depend-  
ing on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmis-  
sion. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.  
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in  
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses  
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns pre-  
vent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving  
up or down long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent over-  
heating the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is  
also selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too  
hot, to protect the transmission itself from damage and to lower the  
oil temperature.  
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:  
• Winter mode is selected.  
• The engine is switched off.  
• The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer  
required.  
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”  
instrument panel, see page 161.  
appears on main  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
166  
Starting and driving  
SPORT and WINTER modes  
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on  
The Winter mode facilitates pulling away and  
driving on icy roads. Third gear is selected auto-  
matically for pulling away to reduce wheelspin.  
Winter mode can be selected when the engine  
is running by pressing the ”W” button on the  
selector-lever surround. It cannot be selected  
when the selector lever is in position M or L.  
Note: It is still possible to use kick-down in the  
Winter mode, in which case a change-down to  
1st or 2nd will take place.  
the selector lever when the selector lever is in  
position N or D.  
In this mode, gear changes will take place at  
higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in  
other words, the transmission will change up  
later andchange downearlier for the same throt-  
tle (accelerator) position.  
The Sport mode will be deselected if:  
The Winter mode will be deselected if:  
• The S button is pressed.  
• The selector lever is moved to position P,R, M  
or L.  
• The W button is pressed.  
• The engine is switched off.  
• The selector lever is moved to position M or L.  
• The automatic-transmission fluid overheats.  
• The engine is switched off.  
• The Winter mode is selected.  
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”  
appears on main instrument panel, see page  
161.  
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”  
appears on main instrument panel, see page  
161.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting and driving 167  
To cancel temporarily  
Cruise control  
Move the control stalk to CANCEL  
(spring-loaded position before OFF posi-  
tion). This will disengage the system but the  
preset speed will be retained in the system  
memory. (The memory is deleted when the  
engine is switched off.)  
WARNING  
• Do not use the Cruise control system  
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or  
on winding roads.  
To re-engage the system  
To revert to the preset speed, slide the  
switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate  
when the car’s speed is above 25 mph  
(40 km/h).  
• Set the control to OFF when you do  
not want to use the system, to prevent  
the system being activated inadvert-  
ently.  
For safety reasons (brake system func-  
tion) the brakes must be applied once,  
when the engine has started, before the  
cruise control system can be activated.  
The system is operated by means of the  
controls on the stalk switch:  
Cruise-control switches  
To set the desired speed  
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the  
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph  
(40 km/h))and press SET/+.  
• ON/OFF (switch on/off).  
To increase the preset speed  
Accelerate to the desired speed and press  
SET/+.  
You can also increase the speed of the car  
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to  
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or  
hold it in and release when the desired  
speed is reached.  
• RESUME/– (Resume preset speed).  
• SET/+ (to set the desired speed).  
• CANCEL (Cancel operation of system,  
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).  
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indi-  
cator light will appear on the main instru-  
ment panel and will be extinguished when  
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is  
selected, CRUISE will flash once.  
Temporary increase in speed  
Press the accelerator to override the preset  
speed, e.g. for overtaking.  
When you release the accelerator, the  
system will revert to the preset speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
168  
Starting and driving  
To reduce the preset speed  
The cruise control system will always disen-  
gage automatically the moment that either  
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is  
depressed.  
It is also possible to reduce the speed by  
means of the RESUME/– button.  
Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will  
reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Holding the button in the RESUME/– posi-  
tion will effect a gradual reduction in speed  
until the button is released.  
Disengaging the system  
Braking  
The system will be disengaged:  
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,  
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a  
drop of several hundred feet), select a low  
gear to use the braking effect of the engine.  
If the car has automatic transmission, move  
the selector lever to position D or L.  
• When the brake or clutch pedal is  
depressed.  
• When the switch is moved to CANCEL.  
• When the switch is moved to OFF.  
• When the engine is switched off.  
• When the selector lever is moved to posi-  
tion N (cars with automatic transmission).  
• When the TCS/ESP system is operative  
for more than 1 minute.  
When driving fast, you can help to prolong  
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and  
braking harder for short periods, rather than  
braking more moderately over long  
stretches.  
Brake pad wear indicators  
The outboard brake pads on the front  
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.  
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad  
will produce a screeching, squealing or  
scrapingnoisewhenthebrakesareapplied.  
New pads should be fitted without delay.  
Brake pads should only be replaced by  
an authorized Saab dealer.  
To ensure optimum brake performance,  
it is recommended that you use only  
Saab original brake pads.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 169  
ABS (antilock braking system) modulates  
the brake pressure to the respective  
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is  
about to lock, and the control module  
reduces the pressure to that wheel and then  
increases it once more until the tendency is  
detected again.  
The brake system is equipped with an Elec-  
tronic Brake-force Distribution device  
(EBD), which distributes the brakepressure  
between the front and rear wheels, in such  
awayas to achieveoptimumbraking perfor-  
mance irrespective of the car’s speed and  
load.  
ABS brakes  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• It is prudent to try your brakes from  
timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin  
heavyrain, throughwatercollectedon  
the road, in snow, on a wet road sur-  
face or in salty slush. In such condi-  
tions, thebrakes may take longer than  
normal to take effect. To rectify this,  
touch the brake pedal periodically to  
dry the brakes out.  
• The additional safety afforded by the  
ABS system is not designed to allow  
drivers to drive faster but to make  
normal driving safer.  
• Tostop asquickly as possible, without  
loss of directional stability, whether  
theroadsurfaceisdry,wetorslippery,  
press the brake pedal down hard-  
without letting up (do not pump the  
pedal), declutching simulta-  
• The same applies after the car has  
been washed or when the weather is  
very humid.  
neously, and steerthecarto safety.  
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.  
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-  
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that  
thebrakediscsandpadswarmupand  
dry.  
• The brakes are power assisted and it  
should be kept in mind that the servo  
unit only provides the power assis-  
tance when the engine is running.  
• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe  
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is  
being towed) is roughly four times the  
normal pedal force required. The  
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-  
sive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Starting and driving  
The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic  
function which will switch on the Anti-lock  
brake warning light if a fault is detected in  
the system (see page 56).  
The ABS system will not reduce the braking  
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice  
but, because the wheels cannot lock up,  
some steering control is retained.  
When the ABS system is working, i.e. mod-  
ulation of the brake pressure is in progress,  
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking  
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly nor-  
mal.  
Press the pedal down hard (you cannot  
press too hard) and steer the car to safety.  
Braking with ABS brakes.  
Braking with ABS – evasive steering  
When the system is operating, the brake  
pedal will pulsate gently and the system  
will make a ticking noise.  
Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe  
car has come to a halt or the danger is  
past!  
That is critical.  
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will  
operate even when only light pressure is  
applied to the pedal. This means that you  
can brake gently to test the condition of the  
road and adapt your driving accordingly.  
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS  
brakes on a skid pad or other suitable facil-  
ity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 171  
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-  
ing with the front wheels on different sur-  
faces (e.g. one slippery and one dry). The  
TCS then functions like an electronic dif-  
ferential lock.  
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-  
ing on a slippery road, in which case the  
TCS eliminates wheelspin. The same  
applies when the car is reversing.  
Traction Control System  
How the system works  
The traction control system (TCS) is  
designed to prevent wheelspin. This  
enables the car to achieve the best possible  
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,  
together with greater stability.  
The TCS system uses information from the  
ABS system’s wheel sensors to detect  
when the front (driving) wheels are rotating  
faster then the rear wheels. It then monitors  
whether one driving wheel is rotating faster  
than the other. If so, the faster wheel is  
retardeduntilbothwheelsarerotatingatthe  
same speed.  
• Oncornering, if thereis atendencyforthe  
inner front wheel to rotate faster than the  
other wheels.  
• On overtaking.  
TCS indicator  
WARNING  
The indicator light will come on for  
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to  
ON, while an internal system check is per-  
formed.  
If the two front wheels are rotating at the  
same speed but are turning faster than the  
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is  
reduced to eliminate the difference.  
To ensure that the system works as  
designed, the dimensions of all four tires  
must be the same.  
When driving normally, TCS will help to  
improve the stability of the car. This does  
not mean that car can be driven faster.  
Thesamecareandprudenceas normally  
applied should be displayed on cornering  
and when driving on slippery roads.  
The  
light in the tachometer comes on  
when the system is operative, i.e. when the  
wheels are not rotating at the same speed.  
The fact that the TCS system is operative  
indicates that the limit for grip has been  
exceeded and that the driver must exert  
greater care.  
The process continues until all the wheels  
are rotating at the same speed.  
TheadvantagesoftheTCSsystembecome  
most apparent when the cohesion between  
the front wheels and the road surface is so  
low that one or both of the wheels would  
lose their grip were the car not equipped  
with the TCS, e.g.:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
172  
Starting and driving  
TCS OFF  
Turning the TCS off  
The TCS is switched on automatically when  
the engine is started.  
Electronic Stability  
Program (ESP)  
The  
indicator on the main instrument  
panel will come on:  
Thesystemcanbeswitchedoffmanuallyby  
The Electronic Stability Program employs  
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and  
the traction control system (TCS). It is a  
safety system that helps the driver to stabi-  
lize the car in unusual circumstances that  
can otherwise be difficult to handle.  
• If a fault has been detected and the  
system has therefore been switched off.  
• If there is a fault in the ABS system.  
• If the system has been switched off man-  
ually.  
The indicator light will also come on for  
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to  
ON, while an internal system check is per-  
formed.  
the TCS button, whereupon  
on the  
main instrument panel will come on. The  
TCSsystemcannotbeswitchedoffifthecar  
is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).  
It may benecessary toswitchoffthesystem  
if the car has become bogged down, for  
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.  
If a fault is detected in the ABS system, the  
TCS will be switched off automatically.  
Thecruise-controlsystemwillautomatically  
bedisengagedafteronesecondifitisactive  
when the TCS starts to operate.  
How the ESP system works  
TheElectronicStability Programcanhelpto  
prevent the car from skidding by braking  
one or several wheels independently of the  
driver. The engine output is then also  
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from  
spinning. Thecarhassensorsthatmeasure  
wheel speed, yaw acceleration, lateral  
acceleration, steering wheel position and  
braking pressure. The values provided by  
these sensors are used to calculate the  
actual direction of the car. If this direction  
does not agree with that intended by the  
driver, calculated from the steering wheel  
position, the ESP is engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 173  
ESP indicator light  
The  
indicator light in the tachometer  
comesonfor ashortperiodoftimewhenthe  
ESP system is operative.  
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced  
cohesion between the tires and the road,  
and that extra care should be taken by the  
driver.  
ESP OFF  
The  
if:  
light in the rev counter comes on  
• A fault has been detected and the system  
has therefore been switched off.  
• The system has been switched off manu-  
ally.  
Turning ESP off  
The system can be turned off manually with  
the ESP button, whereupon the light  
on the main instrument panel will come on.  
The ESP system cannot be switched off if  
the car is travelling faster than 35 mph  
(60 km/h).  
The ESP is always operative during brak-  
ing, even if it has been switched off manu-  
ally.  
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON  
position, the lamp is lit for about four sec-  
onds while the system undergoes a  
self-test.  
Increased stability with ESP.  
The system applies the brakes to the  
wheels as shown to prevent the car from  
skidding  
ESP improves the driver’s chances of  
retaining control over the car in critical situ-  
ations.  
WARNING  
To ensure that the system works as  
designed, the dimensions of all four tires  
must be the same.  
When driving normally, ESP will help to  
improve the stability of the car. This does  
not mean that car can be driven faster.  
Thesamecareandprudenceasnormally  
applied should be displayed on cornering  
and when driving on slippery roads.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
Starting and driving  
Economical motoring  
NOTICE  
Factors affecting fuel consumption  
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the  
general driving conditions, the way in which  
the car is driven and at what speeds, the  
weather, the state of the road, the condition  
of the car, etc.  
Suspension modifications, such as  
changing the type of wheels, dampers or  
springs, canaffectthefunctionoftheESP  
system.  
Always consult a Saab dealer before  
changing any suspension components.  
Breaking-in  
Fuelconsumptionmaybesomewhathigher  
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–  
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated.  
Weather conditions  
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %  
lower in summer than in winter. The higher  
consumptionincoldweatherisexplainedby  
the longer time it takes for the engine to  
reach normal operating temperature, and  
for the transmission and wheel bearings to  
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by  
the distance driven: short journeys of 3–  
5 miles (5–8 km) do not give the engine  
enough time to reach normal temperature.  
Strong winds can also affect fuel consump-  
tion.  
Percentage increase in fuel consumption  
of engine starting from cold compared to  
engine at normal temperature.  
How to read the graph above:  
If fuel consumption with the engine at  
normal temperature is 28 mpg  
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3  
miles (5 km) after the engine has started  
from cold will be:  
– 23.5mpg(12l/100 km)atoutsidetemp.of  
68°F (20°C) (increase of 20 %).  
– 17.7mpg(16l/100 km)atoutsidetemp.of  
32°F (0°C) (increase of 60 %).  
– 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of  
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100 %).  
As can be seen, both the distance travelled  
bythecarandtheoutsidetemperaturehave  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 175  
a major impact on fuel consumption after  
theenginehasstartedfromcold. Thus,ifthe  
car is mainly used for short journeys of  
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption  
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.  
• Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel  
consumption than in a high gear because  
of the higher engine speed for a given  
roadspeed. Alwayschangeuptoahigher  
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow  
and use the highest gear as much as pos-  
sible.  
Road conditions  
Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo  
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country  
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is  
less than the additional amount required to  
climb the hill).  
Driving technique  
To obtain the best running economy, not  
only regarding fuel consumption but gen-  
eral wear also, regular service is required.  
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,  
heavybrakingandmuchlow gear workall  
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.  
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting  
in cold weather, the use of studded tires  
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all  
increase fuel consumption.  
• Do not run the engine when the car is sta-  
tionary.  
If idling, it will take much longer before the  
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is  
greatest during this warming-up phase.  
Therefore drive away as soon as possible  
after the engine is started and avoid high  
revving.  
• Check the air pressure in the tires once a  
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire  
wear. It is better to have slightly higher  
pressure than lower.  
• Check fuel consumption regularly.  
Increased consumption can indicate that  
something is wrong and that the car  
needs to be checked by an authorized  
Saab dealer.  
Practical trials on the roads have demon-  
strated that substantial savings in fuel con-  
sumption can be made if the above advice  
is heeded.  
WARNING  
Never switch the engine off while driving  
as the effect of the brakes and power  
steering will be greatly reduced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
Starting and driving  
• Check the anti-freeze in the engine cool-  
ant, see page 207.  
The car´s trip computer will warn you when  
there is a risk of slippery conditions. For fur-  
ther information on this function, see page  
64.  
Engine block heater (standard  
equipment in Canada, accessory in  
U.S.)  
The following are just some of the benefits  
to the car and the environment of using an  
engine block heater:  
Driving in cold weather  
Before starting a journey in cold weather  
you should check the following:  
• That the wiper blades have not become  
frozen to the windshield/glass.  
The car is equipped with tires designed to  
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry  
roads, although this has been achieved at  
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on  
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow  
and ice, we therefore recommend that  
winter (snow) tires be fitted.  
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded  
tires (where use is legally permitted), gener-  
ally make driving safer on snow and ice.  
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-  
sions governing the use of different  
types of winter tires and snow chains.  
Studded tires are not allowed in some  
countries.  
• Brush any snow away from the air intake  
for the heater system (opening between  
hood and windshield).  
• It may be advisable to lubricate the  
door-lock cylinder (use molybdenum  
disulphide, MoS2) to prevent its freezing.  
If the lock has frozen, take care not to  
break the key (or use the remote control)  
– heat it first or spray it with de-icer.  
• Periodically during the winter, add gaso-  
line anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any  
condensation in the fuel tank which could  
freezeandcauseproblems in thesystem.  
Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk  
of condensation forming.  
• Lower fuel consumption.  
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced  
over short runs.  
• Reduced wear on the engine.  
• Inside of car warms up faster.  
The engine heater is effective at outside  
temperatures up to +15–20°C. The warmer  
it is outside, the shorter the time the engine  
heater needs to be connected. Longer than  
1.5 hours is unnecessary.  
If the car is equipped with a removable,  
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this  
should be stored in the luggage compart-  
ment.  
If the car is parked outside in freezing  
weather, fuel additives (gasoline  
anti-freeze) will not do any good as it  
cannot remove water that has already fro-  
zen. Park the car in a warm place so that  
any ice that may have built up melts, then  
add gasoline anti-freeze when filling up  
the tank. Condensation is caused by  
changes in the outdoor temperature or by  
the car being parked alternately in a  
garage and outside.  
• It is particularly important when the roads  
are slippery that the brakes andtires bein  
good condition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 177  
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must  
befittedonall wheels. YourSaab dealer will  
bepleasedtoadviseyouonthebesttiresfor  
your car.  
Remember that tires age. It may therefore  
be necessary to change them before they  
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually  
lose their friction properties.  
Tire chains  
Driving in hot weather  
• Always check the coolant level before  
startingajourney. Thelevelshouldbejust  
below the MAX mark.  
• At the end of a journey, if the engine has  
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or  
three minutes before switching it off.  
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally  
permitted) they should only be fitted to the  
tires recommended under ”Specifications”  
(see page 278).  
Consult your Saab dealer for details of  
approved tire chains.  
The best response if the car gets into a  
front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual  
gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so  
that the wheels are neither driven or  
retarded by the engine.  
If the car has automatic transmission, ease  
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in  
the desired direction.  
WARNING  
If the needle on the temperature gauge  
enters the red zone:  
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)  
when tire chains are fitted.  
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the  
engine running. Do not remove the cap  
on the expansion tank even if the tank is  
empty. If the needle on the temperature  
gaugecontinuestorisewhiletheengine  
is idling, switch off the engine.  
• Tire chains can reduce the directional  
stability of the car.  
• Tire chains must not be used on the  
rear wheels.  
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direc-  
tion that the rear of the car is moving.  
NOTICE  
• Check the links frequently for wear.  
• Check that the chains do not contact  
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.  
• See section ”Specifications”, page  
278, for information on allowable  
wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire  
chains.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
178  
Starting and driving  
2 Wait until the needle has dropped back  
to indicate normal temperature (roughly  
midway, in the white zone) before stop-  
pingtheengine. If thecoolant needstop-  
ping up, unscrew the cap on expansion  
tank carefully.  
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a  
50/50mixtureofSaab-approvedcoolant  
and water. If only water is available, use  
that, but remember to have the coolant  
mixture checked as soon as possible.  
Trailer hitch attachment  
Towing a trailer  
Trailer hitch attachments are available as  
accessories. These are designed for a max-  
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs. (1588 kg),  
see also page 271.  
WARNING  
• When towing a trailer, do not attempt  
to negotiate a hill having a gradient in  
excess of 15 %. The weight distribu-  
tionoverthefrontwheels ofthecarwill  
be insufficient to prevent wheelspin,  
making further progress impossible.  
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket  
provided in the trailer hitch kit.  
Saab recommends:  
• Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment  
which is designed and tested by Saab.  
• Consult your Saab dealer regarding the  
appropriate hitch kit for your car.  
• In addition, the parking brake may not  
always be able to hold the car and  
trailer securely, with the result that the  
wheels can start to slide downhill.  
WARNING  
• Exercise care when opening the hood  
if the engine is overheated. Never  
remove the expansion tank cap com-  
pletely when the engine is hot.  
NOTICE  
• Always apply the trailer’s handbrake  
when unhitching it. There is otherwise  
a risk of personal injury or damage to  
the bumper should the trailer start to  
roll.  
Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch and  
wiring, since other wiring methods can  
cause expensive damage to the car’s  
body and electrical system.  
• The cooling system is pressurized -  
hot coolant and vapor can escape.  
These can cause injury to your eyes  
and burns. Open the cap slowly to  
release the pressure before  
removing it.  
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for  
guidance on how to connect the trailer  
hitch electrical system.  
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling  
system checked by an authorized Saab  
dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 179  
Maximum recommended trailer weights  
for different gradients  
Recommendations for driving in hilly  
terrain  
The following time limits are based on the  
capacity of the cooling system in warm  
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).  
Trailer weight  
Maximum recommended trailer weights for  
different gradients, with a view to comfort  
and drivability for manual and automatic  
cars, are shown on the drawing.  
Make sure you are familiar with the law  
regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-  
mum trailer weights, trailer-braking  
requirements, and also any special  
driving-licence provisions  
Gradient Maximum  
of hill, % trailerweight, tion, minutes  
lbs. (kg)  
Maximum dura-  
6–7  
3300 (1500) unlimited  
3300 (1500) 15 max  
(see also page 271).  
8–9  
The specified trailer weights and gradients  
assumethat thejourney startsat thehill and  
therefore apply only to short periods.  
10–15  
1870 (850)  
15 max  
The following time limits are based on the  
capacity of the cooling system in hot  
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).  
Gradient Maximum  
Maximum dura-  
of hill, % trailerweight, tion, minutes  
lbs. (kg)  
6–7  
2000 (900)  
2000 (900)  
1000 (450)  
unlimited  
15 max  
8–9  
10–15  
15 max.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
Starting and driving  
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-  
ing important considerations in mind:  
Use Normal mode when driving with a cara-  
van or trailer on hilly roads. The adaptive  
gear change pattern function will prevent  
the transmission overheating.  
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated  
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-  
ment panel.  
Recommendations for cars with  
automatic transmission  
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated  
bythetemperature gauge in the main instru-  
ment panel.  
When continuing your journey, select  
manual mode and a gear in which the  
engine speed is about 3,000 rpm until the  
incline eases (see page 164).  
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorderasthe  
temperature of the engine increases:  
VARNING  
Remembertousethebrakingeffectofthe  
engine (position D or L) when you are  
descending long or steep hills to spare  
the brakes.  
• Gear change pattern is altered.  
• A/C compressor is switched off.  
• Engine torque is reduced.  
The following message will be displayed on  
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes  
too hot: “Gearbox too hot. Make a safe stop.  
Brake failure can result from overheated  
brakes!  
If this message appears, stop the car as  
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the  
engine to idle until the message has gone  
out. The selector lever should be in  
position P.  
Do not drive continuously with the WINTER  
mode selected in hilly country when you are  
towing a caravan, as this will increase fuel  
consumptionandrisk overheating the trans-  
mission.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 181  
Recommendations for cars with manual  
gearbox  
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated  
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-  
ment panel.  
Driving considerations  
Checks before driving  
Always take extra care when towing a  
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different  
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s  
braking system and suspensionalsohavea  
considerable effect on these characteris-  
tics,seealsoDrivingwithaloadpage 185.  
Makesurethatthecarandcaravanortrailer  
are in good working order. This is essential  
since towing a caravan increases the strain  
on the car.  
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorder as the  
temperature of the engine increases:  
• Check and if necessary adjust the tire  
pressure of the car and caravan.  
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly  
tightened.  
• Make sure that the equipment joining the  
car and caravan is properly secured and  
adjusted.  
Ifthecarhasautomatic transmission, select  
position D when ascending steep hills. This  
ensures that the adaptive gear change pat-  
terns are operational, see page 165. Use  
position D or L for steep descents.  
• A/C compressor is switched off.  
• engine torque is reduced.  
Whencontinuingyourjourney,selectagear  
in which the engine speed is about  
3,000 rpm until the incline eases.  
• Make sure the caravan’s electrical cable  
is properly connected and is not so long  
that it drags along the ground. Also, make  
sure the cable is not too short and risks  
breaking when turning a corner.  
• Check all bulbs.  
• Check the car and caravan brakes.  
• Make sure that all items on or in the cara-  
van or trailer are properly secured.  
• Make sure that the caravan’s jockey  
wheel is raised and locked.  
NOTICE  
VARNING  
If the ”Automatic transmission, fault indi-  
cator” indicator  
towing until the problem has been recti-  
fied.  
comes on, cease  
Utilize the braking effect of the engine  
(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are  
descending long or steep hills to spare  
the brakes.  
Brake failure can result from overheated  
brakes!  
• Check the distribution of the load so that  
the car and caravan are well balanced.  
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide  
the best possible rearward vision.  
• Make sure the caravan’s safety cable is  
correctly attached.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Starting and driving  
Trailer hitch load  
The weight distribution on the trailer makes  
a lot of difference to the handling properties  
of the car and trailer combination. As  
regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-  
sible, concentrate the load over the wheels  
and keep it as low as possible.  
The trailer should be loaded so that the  
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5 % to  
7 % of the trailer weight with a maximum  
permissible tongue weight of 110–165 lbs.  
(50–75 kg).  
Notethatthisloadmustbeaddedtothetotal  
load for the car. If this now exceeds the  
specified load capacity, the load in the lug-  
gage compartment will have to be reduced  
by a corresponding amount.  
Distribution of load in trailer  
a Light  
b Moderate  
Attach the safety chains to the holes as  
illustrated.  
c Heavy  
WARNING  
When you connect the trailer be sure to  
attach its safety chains to the holes as  
illustrated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 183  
Driving with a roof rack  
load  
WARNING  
• A roof load will affect the car’s center  
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be  
aware of this when cornering and driv-  
ing in crosswinds.  
• Suit your speed to the prevailing con-  
ditions.  
• Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel  
economymaysufferwhendrivingwith  
a roof rack.  
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)  
9-5 Sedan  
The carrier feet are marked with a top view  
of the car and arrow indicating their posi-  
tions.  
3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.  
Restthecarriercarefullyacrosstheroof,  
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the  
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging  
the paintwork.  
The maximum permissible roof load is  
220 lbs. (100 kg).  
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the  
pins on the foot into the fixing holes.  
Make sure that the rubber strip comes  
inside the plastic cover on the carrier.  
Repeat the procedure with theother car-  
rier.  
Note that the roof load is included in the  
car’s maximum permissible load (see page  
270).  
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-  
cially for the car are available from your  
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load  
safely.  
1 Sliptheplastic coveronto theadjustable  
foot ofthecarrier (footwithknobfortight-  
ening) to protect the paintwork during  
assembly.  
2 Open all the doors.  
Fold back the rubber strip and find the  
fixing holes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
184  
Starting and driving  
4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of  
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in  
place.  
5 Now go around to the other side of the  
car and remove the plastic cover from  
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back  
the rubber strip and insert the pins on  
the foot into the fixing holes. Do the  
samewiththeother carrierandclosethe  
doors gently.  
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob  
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just  
enough to bring the foot up against the  
edges of the fixing holes.  
Remove the carriers when not in use, as  
they increase fuel consumption.  
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)  
9-5 Wagon  
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.  
2 Check the markings on the cross mem-  
bers to see which is the front and which  
is the rear roof carrier.  
3 Place the cross members on the roof  
rails, on their respective sides of the  
center supports. The cross members  
must not be placed beyond the front or  
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-  
tance between the cross members is at  
least 28 inches (700 mm).  
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross  
members must be positioned so that the  
tailgate can be opened fully without hit-  
ting the roof box.  
The instructions that accompany the carri-  
ers also include adviceondrivingwitha roof  
load – we strongly recommend that you  
read them carefully.  
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so  
that it lies snugly against the outside of  
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-  
riers are seated centrally on the rubber  
spacers and that these sit correctly on  
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down  
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.  
5 Center the roof carriers so that they pro-  
trude equally on both sides.  
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.  
Ensure that the tightening knobs are  
upright once the roof carriers have been  
tightened.  
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely  
in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 185  
Driving at night  
Driving with a load  
Bear in mind the following points when  
driving at night:  
The driving characteristics of the car are  
affected by the way it is loaded.  
• Nighttime driving requires your full con-  
centration.  
• Place heavy loads as far forward and as  
low as possible in the trunk.  
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking  
slightly longer.  
• Secure the load to the tie downs, see  
page 137.  
• Thenumberofdriversundertheinfluence  
ofdrugsislikelytobegreateratnightthan  
during the day.  
• The load should be such that the car´s  
total weight or axle weight are not  
exceeded, see page 270.  
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-  
ing vehicles.  
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor eye-  
sight. Night vision deteriorates with age.  
• Keep your car's headlights, windows and  
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,  
make sure they are clean.  
• Make sure you are well rested before  
startingalongjourney.Takeabreakevery  
other hour.  
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of  
gravity is further back. As a result, the car  
will sway more during evasive steering.  
• Never exceed the permissible load in the  
roof box, even if there is room for more.  
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –  
slight overinflation is preferable to under-  
inflation.  
• The braking distance of a loaded car is  
always greater. Keep your distance from  
the vehicle in front.  
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a  
tendency to induce tiredness.  
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-  
communication.  
Tire pressure, see page 280 and back  
cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
186  
Starting and driving  
The tire pressure should match the current  
load and speed of the car; see page 279 or  
the tire pressure label on page 280.  
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,  
that is tires that are the same temperature  
as the outside air temperature.  
The tire pressure increases as the tires  
become warm (e.g. during highway driving)  
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When  
the temperature of the tires changes by 50°  
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar  
(2 psi).  
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe  
tires are hot when you check them, only  
increase the pressure, if necessary.  
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than  
slightly overinflated tires.  
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit  
a new one.  
Important! Remember to adjust the tire  
pressures if you change the load in the car  
or intend to drive at substantially lower or  
higher speeds than normal.  
Tires  
WARNING  
Check the tire pressure at least once a  
month and before long journeys. Under-  
inflation can result in:  
• Punctures  
• Separation of the tire and tread  
• Damage to the sidewalls  
• Damage to the rims on poor roads  
• Poor handling characteristics  
• Premature tire wear  
• Increased fuel consumption.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 187  
The following should be observed when the  
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is  
fitted:  
Driving considerations  
with compact spare  
wheel/tire fitted  
• The compact spare is light and easy to  
handle when changing the wheel.  
• Do not drive further than necessary with  
the compact spare fitted – the maximum  
life of the wheel is only just over  
2000 miles (3,500 km).  
• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-  
ble.  
WARNING  
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as  
the tire can overheat and adversely  
affect the handling of the car.  
• Tire pressure: refer to page 279.  
Important considerations when driving with  
a compact spare tire:  
• The spare wheel or punctured tire  
must be stowed under the trunk floor,  
andsecuredinplacewiththeretaining  
nut.  
• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.  
• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan  
one compact tire at a time.  
• Avoid driving against a curb.  
• Do not use snow chains.  
• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would con-  
ceal the warning text.  
NOTICE  
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy  
wheel it can be placed outside up in the  
spare-wheel well but only while driving to  
the closest workshop.  
A general rule is that all heavy loads must  
be well secured in the luggage compart-  
ment, see page 137 and 140.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
188  
Starting and driving  
Driving with the trunk  
lid/tailgate open  
Driving in deep water  
Towing the car  
NOTICE  
WARNING  
Avoiddrivingwiththetrunk lid/tailgatepartly  
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be  
drawn into the cabin.  
Do not drive in water deeper than  
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster  
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be  
suckedintotheengine.Theenginewillbe  
seriously damaged if water enters the  
intake system.  
• Remember that the brake servo does  
not operate when the engine is off.  
Much greater pressure than normal  
will therefore be required to operate  
the brake pedal.  
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate  
open, all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)  
must be closed and the cabin fan on at its  
highest speed setting.  
• Nor does the steering servo operate  
when the engine is off. The steering  
will therefore be much heavier than  
usual.  
• The towing vehicle should always be  
heavier than the vehicle on tow.  
• Never allow passengers to ride in the  
car being towed.  
• Always seek professional help if the  
car needs to be towed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Starting and driving 189  
Front towing eye  
WARNING  
• Make sure that the towing eye at the  
front is screwed in tightly.  
• The towing eye is only designed for  
usewhenthecarisbeingtowedonthe  
road. It must not be used to pull the  
car out of a ditch, for example.  
• Make sure that all bystanders keep a  
suitable distance, in case the towing  
eye or tow rope should break. The  
towing eye or tow rope could catapult  
off and cause seriously injury.  
Front towing eye  
Rear towing eye  
Thefront towingeyeisstoredwiththe spare  
wheel.  
Rear towing eye  
The car has a permanently mounted towing  
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a  
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the  
towing eye.  
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the  
towing eye is midway along the engine sub-  
frame at the front of the car.  
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the  
towing eye securely.  
To ensure that the towing eye is in far  
enough, insert the handle of the wheel  
wrench through the eye for additional lever-  
age.  
NOTICE  
• Do not drive the car with the front  
towing eye in position. If it catches the  
curb, for example, the engine sub-  
frame could be damaged.  
• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when  
the towing eye has been removed, to  
keep dirt and moisture out of the  
threads.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Starting and driving  
Towing the car  
Transporting the car  
NOTICE  
Never use the towing eyes to pull the  
If a car with a sport (lowered) chassis is  
transported, for example on a flat bed  
truck, take extra care not to damage the  
spoiler and/or underbody.  
car unstuck.  
Gear lever in neutral (in cars with automatic  
transmission: selector lever at N (neutral))  
Turn on the parking lights.  
Drive carefully and do not exceed the  
speed limit for vehicles being towed.  
Always try to keep the towrope taut by  
gently applying the brake, as necessary.  
This will avoid the towrope being jerked  
violently.  
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car  
unstuck  
Cars with automatic transmission  
The local regulations on towing speeds  
must be followed.  
The highest permissible towing speed is  
30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit is  
lower. The longest permissible towing dis-  
tance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car has to  
be transported farther than that, summon a  
tow truck. A flat bed tow truck is the pre-  
ferred method to tow.  
NOTICE  
• The car must be towed front first.  
• If the car is to be towed with the front  
wheels off the ground, make sure the  
parking brake is off, as this acts on the  
rear wheels.  
Failure to follow these guidelines can result  
in damage.  
The car cannot be bump started. In an  
emergency, it is possible to start the engine  
using jump leads (see the section, ”Jump  
starting” on page 191).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 191  
To jump start your vehicle:  
Jump starting  
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a  
12-volt battery with a negative ground  
system.  
WARNING  
• When working on the battery, highly  
explosive gas can build up. A spark  
could ignite this gas that collects  
around the battery.  
Therefore, always avoid sparks and  
open flames in the vicinity of the bat-  
tery.  
NOTICE  
+
If the other system is not a 12-volt system  
with a negative ground, both vehicles can  
be damaged.  
+
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the  
jumpercablescanreach,butbesurethe  
vehiclesarenottouchingeachother. If a  
poor connection on the negative jumper  
cable should exist, it is possible for  
damage to be caused to electrical sys-  
tems/components of either vehicle  
should inadvertent contact be made.  
You would not be able to start your car  
and bad grounding could damage elec-  
trical systems.  
• The battery containscorrosivesulfuric  
acid. Always wear a face mask or gog-  
gles when working on the battery.  
NOTICE  
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or  
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash  
the affected area liberally with water.  
If acid gets into the eyes or a large  
quantity makes contact with the skin,  
seek medical help.  
Ignoring these steps could result in costly  
damage to your vehicle that would not be  
covered by your warranty.  
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-  
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if  
you have a manual transmission. If you  
have an automatic transmission, your  
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or  
pulling it.  
• Battery posts, terminals and related  
accessories contain lead and lead  
compounds. Wash your hands after  
handling.  
WARNING  
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.  
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-  
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P  
(Park) or a manual transmission in Neu-  
tral.  
If your battery has run down, you may want  
to use another vehicle and some jumper  
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps  
below to do it safely.  
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.  
Turn off all lights that are not needed,  
and radios. This will avoid sparks and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
192  
Starting and driving  
help save both batteries and it could  
save your radio.  
5 Check that the jumper cables do not  
have loose or missing insulation. If they  
do, you could get a shock and also the  
vehicles could be damaged.  
Before you connect the cables, here are  
some basic things you should know.  
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and  
negative (–) will go to a major metal  
engine part with a good ground. Do not  
connect (+) to (–) or you will get a short  
that could injure you or would damage  
the battery and maybe other parts as  
well.  
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the  
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with  
the discharged battery.  
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.  
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of  
the good battery. Use a remote positive  
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
WARNING  
NOTICE  
Using a match or flame of any kind near a  
battery can cause battery gas to explode.  
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a  
flashlight if you need more light.  
If you leave your radio on, it could be  
badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe  
covered by your warranty.  
Be sure the battery has enough water.  
The battery installed in your new Saab  
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount  
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled  
water if the level is too low. If you don’t,  
explosive gas could be present.  
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.  
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-  
nals on the battery.  
WARNING  
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not  
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.  
When connecting jumper cables to a  
frozen battery, gas from the chemical  
reaction inside the battery can build up  
under the ice and cause an explosion.  
Anelectric fancan startup even when the  
engine is not running and can injure you.  
Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom  
any underhood electric fan.  
8 Now connect the black negative (–)  
cable to the good battery’s negative ter-  
minal.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn  
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-  
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,  
flush the area with water and get medical  
help immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 193  
Charging the battery/Jump starting  
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical  
system and electronics, the following rules  
must be followed when charging the battery  
or jump starting the car.  
WARNING  
Do not let the other end touch anything  
until the next step. The other end of the  
negative cable does not go to the dead  
battery. It goes to a major metal part with  
a good ground on the engine of the vehi-  
cle with the discharged battery.  
• If the charger or starter unit can be set to  
differentvoltages(6V/12V/18V/24V),12V  
must be selected.  
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions  
supplied with the charger or starter unit.  
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches  
(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-  
tery, but not near engine parts that  
move. To avoid an arc which could deto-  
nate the hydrogen gas around the bat-  
tery,thefinalconnectionmustbeatleast  
18” from the battery.  
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery  
and run the engine for a while.  
11 Try to start the vehicle with the dis-  
charged battery. If it does not start after  
a few tries, it probably needs service.  
• No other apparatus that are grounded or  
connected to the mains must be  
connected to the car during charging or  
jump starting.  
• The charger or starter unit must under no  
conditions produce a voltage greater  
than:  
• 16V continuous  
• 18V for 60 min.  
• If you are unsure about the charge rating  
of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp  
from the positive terminal before connect-  
ing the unit to the battery.  
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to  
prevent electrical shorting. Take care  
that they do not touch each other or any  
other metal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Starting and driving  
Saab Parking  
Assistance  
(Option)  
WARNING  
Responsibility always lies with the driver  
when reversing.  
• SaabParkingAssistancecanfacilitate  
reversingatlowspeeds,suchaswhen  
reverse parking.  
Area monitored by the sensors seen from  
the side  
Area monitored by the sensors seen from  
above  
• Bear in mind that small and/or narrow  
objects cannot always be detected by  
the system.  
The system uses four sensors in the rear  
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that  
bounce back to the sensors off any objects  
behind the car. The system, however,  
cannot always detect small or narrow  
objects or objects that do not reflect ultra-  
sound back towards the car, such as pipes,  
or the corner of a house or rectangular post.  
The system is activated automatically when  
reverse is engaged or selected. When the  
sensors detect an object within the moni-  
tored area, the SID will display the text  
"PARK ASSIST" and pulses of sound  
(- - - - -) will be heard. The frequency of the  
pulses increases as the car comes closer to  
the object.  
The parking aid system facilitates parking  
and reversing. There are four sensors in  
the rear bumper that detect objects up to 6  
feet (1.8 metres) behind the car.  
When the distance to the object is less  
than 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone  
will be heard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting and driving 195  
Pressing a SID button briefly will not disen-  
gage the system, the display will simply  
show the previously selected function.  
NOTICE  
Reverse slowly so that you have time to  
stop the car when the continuous tone is  
heard at approx. 12 in. (30 cm).  
NOTICE  
Tofunctionwell,thesensorsmustbekept  
clean. Ice snow and dirt can affect their  
sensitivity.  
When an object is approximately 3 feet  
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses  
change character markedly. A distance of  
about 3 feet (90 cm) is suitable if you wish  
to load or unload the luggage compartment.  
Do not spray the sensors or closer than  
8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with a pres-  
sure washer, as this could damage them.  
If the distance between an object and the  
corner sensors does not change for three  
seconds, e.g. if you are reversing alongside  
a wall, the system will switch to monitoring  
straight back. The system indicates if the  
distance to the wall decreases again.  
The system can be disengaged for when  
driving with a trailer. Press and hold the  
CLEAR button on the SID when the display  
shows "PARK ASSIST", until the display  
shows"PARK ASSIST OFF". Thesystem is  
re-engaged in the same way. The system is  
also always activated when the ignition key  
is turned to ON.  
Ice, snow and dirt can affect the sensitivity  
of the sensors. In such cases a continuous  
tone will sound warning the driver that the  
system cannot measure the distance to an  
object. You canturnthesystem off bypress-  
ing and holding the CLEAR button for  
1.5 seconds.  
If the text "PARK ASSIST FAILURE" is dis-  
played on the SID, have the system  
checked by an authorized Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Starting and driving  
Parking brake  
Parking  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Always apply the parking brake when  
you park the car.  
• Do not leave children or pets unat-  
tended in the car. In warm, sunny  
weather, the temperature inside the  
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).  
Always apply the parking brake  
before removing the ignition key.  
• Park where the vehicle will not create  
an obstruction or a hazard to other  
road users.  
• Do not use the parking brake while  
driving.  
• Do not park on dry grass or other com-  
bustible material. The catalytic con-  
verter gets very hot and could start a  
fire.  
The parking brake is situated between the  
front seats and acts on the rear wheels.  
When the parking brake is on, the indicator  
light  
on the main instrument panel will  
• Apply the parking brake.  
be on. To release the parking brake, lift the  
lever slightly, press the release button and  
release the lever by pushing down on it.  
• Shift to Reverse for manual transmis-  
sion (automatic transmission: move  
selectorlevertoP(Park)),andremove  
the ignition key. Lock the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting and driving 197  
NOTICE  
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:  
• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,  
computer or similar object visible in  
your car.  
• Clothing, packages and bags attract  
thieves.  
• Do not leave small objects such as  
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.  
1
2
3
• If possible, park in a well-lit,  
conspicuous parking space.  
1 Pointing downhill and  
against the curb  
Turn the wheels into  
the curb and edge the  
car forward until the  
wheels touch the curb.  
2 Pointing uphill and  
against the curb  
Turn the wheels away  
from the curb and edge  
the car back until the  
wheels touch the curb.  
3 Pointing uphill or  
downhill – no curb  
Turn the wheels  
towards the edge of the  
road. If the car should  
startrolling,itwillnotrun  
into the road.  
• Thieves strike whenever and wher-  
ever they are given the opportunity.  
Parking on a hill  
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front  
wheels so that they will be blocked by the  
curb if the car should move.  
Long-term parking  
If the car is not going to be used for some  
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps  
are recommended:  
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs  
by taking the car out on the road and  
applying the brakes a few times.  
• Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent con-  
densation forming in it.  
Top up the coolant and check the anti-  
freeze before the onset of winter.  
• Park the car in a dry, covered and  
well-ventilated building. Leave the park-  
ing brake OFF!  
long-term parking, remove the battery  
and store it away from the frost.  
• Ideally,thecarshouldbeputuponblocks,  
withthewheelsofftheground.Ifthisisnot  
possible, inflate the tires to about 43 psi  
(300 kPa).  
• Leave all the windows open a crack and  
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin – not  
one made of plastic.  
• Run the engine to normal temperature  
before long-term parking.  
• Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and  
hoses.  
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber  
seals on the hood, luggage compartment  
lid and doors, and lubricate them with  
glycerol (glycerin).  
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.  
If frost is likely to occur during the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
Starting and driving  
(This page has been left blank)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 199  
Car care and  
technical  
information  
Changing bulbs_______  
Fuses _______________  
Tires ________________  
Compact spare tire ____  
Air conditioning (ACC) _  
Safety belts __________  
Upholstery and trim ___  
Textile carpeting ______  
Washing the car ______  
Waxing and polishing __  
Engine compartment __  
Touching up the paint__  
Anti-corrosion treatment  
215  
227  
233  
252  
253  
253  
253  
254  
255  
255  
255  
256  
For long trips_________  
258  
Hood ________________  
Engine compartment___  
200  
201  
Recovery and/or recycling  
of automotive materials  
258  
259  
Emission control systems 202  
Headlight aiming______  
Engine_______________  
Engine oil ____________  
Transmission fluid_____  
Coolant ______________  
Brake and clutch fluid__  
Power steering fluid ___  
Air filter______________  
Battery ______________  
Drive belts ___________  
Wipers and washers ___  
203  
204  
206  
207  
208  
209  
209  
210  
212  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
Car care and technical information  
Hood  
The hood release handle is located under-  
neath the instrument panel. To open the  
hood:  
1 Pull the release handle.  
2 The front of the hood will now spring up,  
providing access to the secondary  
safety catch.  
3 Push the catch upwards, lifting the hood  
at the same time. The hood can now be  
lifted right up.  
To close the hood, release it from a height  
ofabout8 in(20 cm). Donotpress down on  
it.  
Hood release handle  
Hood secondary safety catch  
WARNING  
Neverholdyourfingersbetweenthehood  
and safety catch if lowering but not clos-  
ing the hood.  
In cold weather, when the mechanism is  
stiff, the hood might need to be released  
from twice the height to lock properly.  
Check that the hood is now closed securely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 201  
Engine compartment  
Engine compartment  
1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap  
2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid  
3 Fuse box  
4 Expansion tank, coolant  
5 Washer-fluid filler cap  
6 Battery  
7 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid  
8 Turbo unit  
9 Ignition discharge module  
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid  
1
2
3
4
10  
9
8
7
6
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
202  
Car care and technical information  
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)  
monitors many different engine parameters  
such as:  
Engine families  
Emission control  
systems  
Saab cars imported into the United States  
and Canada meet all applicable emission  
control standards. The engine family and  
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-  
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner  
fender.  
These engine families meet applicable EPA  
Federal Standards, California State Stan-  
dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand  
are equipped with the following systems:  
Thesystems forcontrollingemissionstothe  
atmosphere require regular checking and  
adjustment at the intervals specified in the  
service program.  
• Intake manifold pressure.  
• Intake air temperature.  
• Crankshaft position.  
• Engine coolant temperature.  
• Throttle position and  
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.  
The ECM receives information regarding  
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-  
back function in the ignition discharge unit.  
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission  
regulations and thereby helping to keep the  
environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine  
will also give maximum fuel economy.  
• Sequential multiport fuel injection sys-  
tem.  
WARNING  
By processing all of this information, the Tri-  
onic system can control fuel injector open-  
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-  
charger boost pressure to provide excellent  
engine performance while maintaining low  
emissions and fuel consumption.  
• Three way catalytic converter.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,  
and certain vehicle components contain  
or emit chemicals known to the State of  
CA to cause cancer and birth defects and  
reproductive harm. In addition, certain  
fluids contained in vehicles and certain  
products of component wear contain or  
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-  
forniatocausecancerandbirthdefectsor  
other reproductive harm.  
• Crankcase emissions control system.  
• Evaporative emission control system.  
• On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.  
NOTICE  
TheTrionicenginemanagementsystems  
continuously monitors the operation of  
these systems and have on-board diag-  
nostic capabilities (OBD II).  
Saab Trionic engine management  
system  
If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK  
The Saab Trionic engine management  
system is a unique Saab development that  
combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,  
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-  
charger boost pressure control into one sys-  
tem.  
ENGINE)” lamp  
in the main instru-  
ment illuminates, this indicates that the  
TrionicECMhasdetectedaproblem. The  
car will continue to operate, but perfor-  
mance may be diminished. You should  
have your car checked by a Saab dealer  
as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 203  
The transmission, located on the right  
(viewed from the front), is integrated with  
the engine. All models have front-wheel  
drive.  
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor  
Recovery)  
Engine  
The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-  
der in-line engine with twin overhead cam-  
shafts and 4 valves per cylinder.  
Hydrocarbon vapors formedwhenrefueling  
will be recovered by the car and not  
released into the atmosphere. The hydro-  
carbons are absorbed in a evaporative  
emission canister. When the engine is sub-  
sequentlystarted,theevaporativeemission  
canister is gradually purged as air is sucked  
into it through a shut-off valve. The hydro-  
carbon/air mixture passes through the evap  
canister purge valve and into the engine  
where it is burned.  
When refueling, make sure you screw the  
filler cap on and keep turning until it has  
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-  
sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-  
nateanda Tightenfuelfiller cap.” message  
to appear on SID.  
This engine is equipped with balance shafts  
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.  
The balance shafts are chain driven and  
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.  
They produce forces and torques that are  
opposed to those generated by the pistons  
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs  
twice for each revolution of the engine.  
Engine noise is also reduced as the  
counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibra-  
tion from the moving parts of the engine.  
Refueling, see page 154.  
Balance shafts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
204  
Car care and technical information  
Changing engine oil  
WARNING  
Engine oil  
Checking the oil level  
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This  
should be done after the engine has been  
runtonormal temperatureandthen allowed  
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stand-  
ing on level ground. Remove the dipstick  
and wipe it clean before checking the level.  
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of  
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-  
ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged  
skin contact whenever possible.  
The oil level must not be allowed to drop  
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor  
shouldoilbefilledbeyondtheMAXmark,as  
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.  
The distance between the MIN and MAX  
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a  
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).  
• Used engine oil contains chemicals  
that have caused cancer in laboratory  
animals. Always protect your skin by  
washing thoroughly with soap and  
water.  
Engine-oil filler cap and dipstick  
• Keep oil out of reach of children.  
When necessary, add oil of the recom-  
mended grade via the dipstick tube.  
• Do not touch the turbocharger or  
exhaust manifold. These get very hot  
when the engine has been running.  
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the  
engineasthiscouldcauseafire. Used  
engine oil is particularly flammable.  
• Protect the environment. Do not dis-  
pose of oil in the ground or down a  
drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil fil-  
ters at an appropriate disposal facility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 205  
The engine oil must be changed in accor-  
dance with the service program, see page  
264.  
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be  
required more frequently, see page 264.  
Oil volume and grade, see page 273.  
Oil changing should be carried out on a  
warm engine.  
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of  
the sump and leave the oil to drain into  
anoiltrayorothersuitablereceptaclefor  
atleasttenminutes. Takecare, as theoil  
may be hot.  
2 After the oil has been drained, unscrew  
and remove the oil filter.  
3 Fit a new filter and tighten it by hand.  
4 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.  
5 Fill with new engine oil.  
Drain plug and oil filter  
Run the engine to normal temperature and  
check the oil level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
Car care and technical information  
Transmission fluid  
Manual transmission  
NOTICE  
Check and top up the fluid in accordance  
with the service program.  
If there is a smell of burning fluid or the  
fluid is black, change the fluid.  
If original fluid cannot be obtained for top-  
ping up (see page 276), automatic trans-  
missionfluidDexronIII(syntheticoil)canbe  
used. If so, the car should be taken to an  
authorized Saab dealer immediately to  
have the reason for low fluid level corrected  
and original fluid installed.  
If the outside temperature is below 50°F  
(10°C), the fluid will not reach the specified  
temperature of 175°F (80°C). In this case,  
the correct fluid levelmay be 0.8 in (20 mm)  
below the MAX mark.  
Automatic transmission  
Check the fluid level as follows:  
Dipstick for automatic-transmission fluid  
1 Stand the car on level ground and apply  
the parking brake. The automatic trans-  
mission fluid must be at normal running  
temperature, approximately 175°F  
(80°C). This can be achieved by driving  
the car for about 30 min on the open  
road.  
2 Withtheengineidling,movetheselector  
lever to D and wait for at least  
15 seconds. Next, move the selector  
levertoRandwaitfor15 secondsagain.  
Finally, move the selector lever to P. Let  
the engine idle.  
3 Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint-free  
cloth and put it back.  
4 Withthe fluid at normaltemperature, the  
level should be between the MAX and  
MIN marks on the dipstick. Top up, as  
necessary, with Saab 3309 automatic  
transmission fluid (mineral oil-based),  
adding it through the dipstick pipe. The  
distance between the MIN and MAX  
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a  
volume of approximately 0.4 qts  
(0.4 liter).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 207  
Note:  
Coolant  
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the  
life-time properties will be affected. Even if  
the coolant is flushed from the system and  
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time  
properties are no longer retained and the  
coolant must then be drained and replaced  
at regular intervals.  
WARNING  
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is  
boiling when you open the hood.  
Never remove the expansion-tank  
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.  
• The cooling system is pressurized –  
hot coolant and vapor can escape  
when the filler cap is released. These  
can cause injury to your eyes and  
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and  
let the engine cool before removing  
the cap.  
NOTICE  
Always mix the antifreeze with the  
appropriate volume of water before  
adding it to the cooling system.  
Coolant expansion tank  
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine  
could still freeze and be damaged. This is  
because the antifreeze will not mix  
properly with the coolant before the  
thermostat has opened to allow full  
circulation.  
• Exercise care when adding coolant.  
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a  
fire risk.  
Coolant  
Thecoolingsystem ischargedat thefactory  
with coolant containing a 45 % concentra-  
tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion  
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in  
reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-  
tection against freezing in very cold  
weather, a stronger concentration will be  
needed.  
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-  
tate checking of the coolant level.  
When the engine is cold, the coolant must  
not lie over the KALT/COLD mark on the  
expansion tank.  
If the message ”Coolant level low. Refill.” is  
displayedontheSID, check theleveloffluid  
in the expansion tank.  
A 60 % concentration of antifreeze will pro-  
vide protection at temperatures down to  
-58 F (–50°C).  
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of  
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.  
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant  
is added, run the engine to normal temper-  
ature and top up again, as necessary.  
The coolant does not normally have to be  
changed during the service life of the car.  
Thetypeofcoolantusedhas areddishcolor  
and should not be mixed with other types of  
coolant. Saab Original coolant should be  
used all year round. Only use coolant  
approved by Saab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
208  
Car care and technical information  
Brake pad wear indicators  
Brake and clutch fluid  
The outboard brake pads on the front  
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.  
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),  
the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-  
ing or scraping noise when the brakes are  
applied. New pads should be fitted without  
delay.  
Brake pads should only be changed by  
an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure  
optimum brake performance, use only  
Saab original brake pads.  
WARNING  
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes  
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs  
waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow  
vapor to form in the brake system, thus  
reducing its performance. It is therefore  
important that brakefluid be changedreg-  
ularly, as specified in the service pro-  
gram.  
Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir  
Checking the fluid level  
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-  
voir is transparent to facilitate checking of  
the fluid level.  
The level should be between the MAX and  
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with  
DOT 4 fluid. Do not use DOT 5 brake fluid.  
The vehicle´s regular braking system is  
adjusted automatically, but the parking  
brake has to be adjusted manually. This  
work, involving adjustment of the parking  
brake cables and brake pads, must only be  
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.  
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-  
tainer.  
Check that there are no leaks in the brake  
system.  
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as  
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the  
reservoir corresponds to the amount of  
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If  
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to  
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not  
necessary.  
Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal  
pedal or parkingbrake-lever travel, whether  
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It  
is therefore essential that brake pads be  
checked regularly, as specified in the ser-  
vice program.  
NOTICE  
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,  
since it can cause the paint to bubble and  
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area  
should be flushed with large quantities of  
water as quickly as possible.  
Changing of the brake fluid should be  
carried out byanauthorized Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 209  
Power steering fluid  
Air filter  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not fill the power steering fluid to  
above the MAX mark. Too much fluid can  
result in leakage.  
For Service and Repair, parts equivalent  
to those used by Saab should be used.  
Be aware that some non standard  
replacement parts may put you in an  
unsafe condition, even if they might fit.  
Power steering fluid on hot engine com-  
ponents constitutes a fire risk.  
Check the levelof thepowersteeringfluidin  
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with  
the service program.  
Power steering fluid reservoir  
The wheels should point forward during the  
check.  
Clean around the cap before it is  
unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the  
cap completely again before checking the  
level.  
TheoilshouldliebetweentheMAXandMIN  
marks when the oil temperature is about  
70°F(+20°C). Iftheoiliscolderthelevelcan  
be lower, and in higher temperatures the  
level can be higher, both of which are  
acceptable.  
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid  
CHF 11S”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
210  
Car care and technical information  
Battery  
NOTICE  
WARNING  
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-  
ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe  
stored away from frost.  
• Work on the battery may entail an  
explosion hazard, since the battery  
gives off hydrogen which forms an  
explosive mixture with the oxygen in  
the air.  
For this reason, always avoid sparks  
or openflames when working near the  
battery.  
If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-  
tery may needto begiven abooster charge.  
This can be done either using a battery  
charger or by taking the car for a long run.  
A car with a standard equipment specifica-  
tion and a fully charged battery can be left  
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient  
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-  
ted, such as a car phone, the charge may  
only be sufficient for about 15 days.  
• The battery containscorrosivesulfuric  
acid. Always wear a face mask or  
goggles when working on the battery.  
Electrolyte level indicator.  
Level correct if level indicator dark.  
Battery should be changed if indicator is  
light  
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or  
splashestheskinorclothing,washthe  
affected area liberally with water.  
If acid gets into the eyes or a large  
quantity makes contact with the skin,  
seek medical help.  
The battery is provided with a cover to pro-  
tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is  
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be  
shortened. To remove the cover, release  
the two clips along its long sides.  
The cover fits the standard battery installed  
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,  
make sure that its dimensions are the same  
as the standard one.  
• Battery posts, terminals and related  
accessories contain lead and lead  
compounds. Wash your hands after  
handling.  
The battery is maintenance free and should  
be changedif theelectrolyte level is too low.  
The indicator on the top side of the battery  
will be white if the battery needs replacing.  
The fluid level and the charge level should  
be checked regularly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 211  
To remove the battery, always disconnect  
thenegative(black) leadfirstandreconnect  
it last when fitting the new battery.  
The battery size must comply with DIN  
53735 MFI 230/2.16.  
NOTICE  
• If boost charging never use anything  
but a 12-volt charger, see page 193.  
• Never reverse the polarity of the bat-  
tery by connecting the leads to the  
wrong terminals. The red, positive  
lead connects to the positive (+) termi-  
nal, andtheblack, negativeleadtothe  
negative (–) terminal.  
Battery  
Correct position for battery clamp  
• Seriousdamagecanoccurtothecar´s  
electrical systemif abattery or alterna-  
tor lead is disconnected while the  
engine is running.  
Charging/replacing the battery  
NOTICE  
• The nut on the battery clamp should  
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.  
To avert the danger of short-circuiting  
between the positive (+) terminal on the  
battery and the inlet manifold on the  
engine, always disconnect the negative  
(–) battery lead first and reconnect it last.  
Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)  
battery terminal (red), andthenegativelead  
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at  
the front of the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
Car care and technical information  
Drive belts  
WARNING  
• Keephands and clothing clearofdrive  
belts when engine is running.  
• Always stop the engine before  
inspecting drive belt.  
• The radiator fan is electric and can  
start even when the engine is  
switched off.  
Routing of the drive belt  
NOTICE  
Serious damage can be done to the car’s  
electrical system if an alternator lead is  
disconnected while the engine is running.  
The alternator is situated on the right-hand  
sideoftheengine, adjacenttothebulkhead.  
It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the crank-  
shaft pulley.  
ThePoly-V-beltalso drives thewater pump,  
the A/C compressor and the steering servo  
pump.  
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted  
automatically by the belt tensioner.  
See also page 55, ”Warning, charging”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 213  
Wipers and washers  
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.  
If poor wiper performance is experienced,  
clean the windshield with a quality glass  
cleaner. This is particularly important if the  
car has been through an automatic car  
wash, as these sometimes leave a wax  
coating on the windshield.  
1
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,  
fit new blades.  
2
Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets  
Changing the windshield wiper  
blades  
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield  
Washer jets  
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if  
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.  
1 Depress the catch.  
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down  
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift  
it off the arm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
214  
Car care and technical information  
Adjusting the washer jet on the rear  
window wiper, 9-5 Wagon  
Washer-fluid filler cap  
The headlights have high-pressure  
washers (certain variants)  
Washers  
Use a small screwdriver to adjust the  
washer jet on the rear window wiper of the  
9-5 Wagon, as illustrated.  
The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts  
(6 liters). When "Washer fluid level low.  
Refill."comes upon the SID, thereservoir is  
down to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add  
at least 50 %of washer- fluid to water to pre-  
vent freezing and for effective cleaning.  
WARNING  
Take care not to spill washer fluid  
concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer  
fluid concentrate contains flammable  
ingredients such as alcohol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 215  
Changing bulbs  
NOTICE  
• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W, since the head-  
light reflector and the wiring of the car are not designed for a  
higher wattage.  
WARNING  
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine to  
avoid danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving parts.  
• Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possi-  
ble short-circuiting.  
The radiator fan can start up even when the engine is switched off.  
• Do not touch the glass of the bulbs with your fingers. The oil  
on your skin can shorten the life of the bulb.  
Xenon headlights are high voltage and must therefore be  
changed at an authorized Saab workshop. Work involving  
high-voltage components is potentially lethal.  
Xenon headlight (certain variants)  
Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as much light as halogen  
bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.  
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.  
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the  
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.  
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling  
system comprises twosensors on the front axle, one on the rear axle  
and a control unit under the headlight housing. Headlight alignment  
is regulated automatically to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic.  
Alignment is also adjusted during braking.  
NOTICE  
• Since the headlight lenses are made of plastic, rinse dried-on  
dirt with water and allow it time to soften up before cleaning  
the lenses. Avoid rubbing the lenses when dry and never use  
solvents.  
• Use de-icer spray instead of scraping the ice off.  
Check that the new bulb is working when finished.  
Use only "Long Life" bulbs.  
Headlight aiming, see page 259.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
216  
Car care and technical information  
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place  
Headlight bulb for high beam (Halogen)  
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps the Halogen lamps are used  
only for high beam flasher if the daytime running lights are deacti-  
vatedandtheheadlight switchis intheoffposition (otherwise Xenon  
lamp is utilized):  
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve  
accessibility to the right-handheadlight, hold asidethe induction  
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,  
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long  
sides of the cover.  
2 Unplug the connector.  
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.  
4 Remove the bulb.  
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.  
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with  
thespring clip. Look through theheadlight lenstohelpfitthebulb  
correctly.  
7 Plug in the connector.  
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is  
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 217  
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place  
Headlight bulb for low beam (Halogen)  
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve  
accessibility to the right-handheadlight, hold asidethe induction  
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,  
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long  
sides of the cover.  
2 Unplug the connector.  
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.  
4 Remove the bulb.  
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.  
Look through the headlight lens to help fit the bulb correctly.  
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with  
the spring clip.  
7 Plug in the connector.  
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is  
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.  
Contact an  
authorized  
Saabworkshop  
if a Xenon  
headlight  
requires  
replacement  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
Car care and technical information  
Parking-light bulb (cars with halogen low  
beam)  
Parking-light bulb (cars with Bi-Xenon low  
beam)  
Front fog lights  
Parking-light bulb (cars with halo-  
gen low beam)  
Theparking-lightbulbisadjacenttothebulb  
for low beam.  
Parking-light bulb (cars with Xenon  
low beam)  
The parking light bulb is adjacent to the  
Xenon lamp.  
Front fog lights (certain variants)  
1 From under the front bumper, grip the  
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.  
2 Unplug the connector.  
3 Change the bulb.  
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the  
lamp unit.  
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the  
lamp unit.  
Refit in the reverse order.  
2 Withdraw the bulb holder.  
3 Change the bulb.  
2 Take hold of the lamp leads and pull out  
the bulb holder. The lamp leads are rein-  
forced to facilitate changing bulbs.  
WARNING  
3 Change the bulb. Look through the  
headlight lens to help fit the bulb cor-  
rectly.  
• Never crawl under a car that is sup-  
ported only by a jack.  
• Always use axle stands. Refer to the  
information on jacks on page 247.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 219  
2
3
1
3
Catch seen from engine bay, left-hand  
side  
Front turn signal bulb  
1 Catch  
2 Bayonet pin  
3 Plastic lugs  
Front turn signal bulbs  
To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit  
has to be removed.  
1 Depress the catch, accessed from the  
engine bay.  
2 Carefully pull out the lamp unit.  
3 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.  
Grip the holder and twist it counterclock-  
wise.  
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp  
unit.  
Catch seen from engine bay, right-hand  
side  
To re-install the lamp unit  
1 Align the catch with the recess in the  
lamp housing holder.  
2 Press the lamp housing towards the  
headlight slightly and press the housing  
towards the rear of the car.  
3 Make sure the locating pin and the two  
plastic lugs enter their respective holes.  
4 Press the lamp housing until it click into  
place.  
5 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.  
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-  
clockwise.  
6 Fit the new bulb and check that it is cor-  
rectly seated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
Car care and technical information  
4
5
4
1
1
6
3
3
2
2
Rear light clusters  
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan  
1 Direction indicators  
2 Taillights  
The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-  
ter are accessed from the luggage compart-  
ment.  
3 Stop lights and taillights  
4 Reversing lights  
5 Rear fog light  
Trunk lid light and taillights,  
9-5 Sedan  
Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you  
must first release the trim at the foot of the  
trunk. This involves removing the handle  
and the three trim fasteners (studs).  
1 Lower the flap (secured with catches).  
6 High-mounted brake light  
2 Squeeze the two plastic lugs and  
remove the bulb holder.  
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in  
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.  
4
1
4
4 Change the bulb.  
1
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the  
tailgate.  
2 Using the peg in the top of the screw-  
driver handle, push in the button in the  
center of the studs.  
6
3 Remove the studs.  
Changing bulbs  
2
5
2
3
3
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 221  
High-mounted stop lights, 9-5 Sedan  
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel  
in the rear headlining has been removed.  
1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing  
in the two clips, one at the time.  
2 Release the bulb holder, which is  
retained by a clip at either end.  
2
3
3
2
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.  
4 Push in the new bulb.  
1
5 Refit the bulb holder.  
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing  
the panel towards the headlining so that  
the two clips engage their respective  
slot.  
High-mounted stop lights  
1 Panel  
2 Retaining clips  
3 Bulbs  
1 Squeeze together the silver plastic lug  
and the electrical connection and with-  
draw the lamp holder.  
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in  
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.  
3 Change the bulb.  
Refitting the trim  
1 Reset the studs by pushing back the  
center buttons so that they protrude by  
0.2 inch (5 mm).  
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-  
gate panel. Press the center buttons in,  
flush with the collar.  
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
Car care and technical information  
Reassembly:  
Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 Wagon  
Rear lights clusters, 9-5 Wagon  
1 Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in  
the tailgate.  
2 Then push the ”hinges” into the recess  
and close the cover.  
1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a  
screwdriver or the ignition key.  
2 Open and remove the cover.  
1 Open the tailgate.  
2 Remove the cover by turning the two  
catches anticlockwise one quarter turn.  
3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.  
3 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it  
slightly counterlockwise.  
3 Remove the two screws securing the  
light cluster to the body.  
4 Press in the bulb and twist it  
counterclockwise.  
5 Change the bulb.  
6 Check that the new bulb is working.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 223  
Reassembly:  
4 Pull the light cluster rearwards and  
angle it outwards (it is seated quite  
firmly).  
5 Release the fastener from the body.  
Reinsert the fastener into the groove in  
the light cluster. Press in the fastener  
until you hear a click.  
Loading lighting, 9-5 Wagon  
1 Align the fastener with the hole in the  
body.  
2 Press the lamp unit home into the body  
until you hear a click.  
1 Pull down the glass cover at the outer  
edge.  
2 Bendoneofthecontactssothatthebulb  
can be removed.  
3 Fit the screws and cover.  
3 Change the bulb.  
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the  
lamp fitting first.  
6 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it  
slightly counterclockwise.  
7 Press in the bulb and twist it counter-  
clockwise.  
8 Change the bulb.  
9 Check that the new bulb works.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
Car care and technical information  
License-plate light  
Side direction indicators  
Courtesy lights (doors and floor)  
and luggage-compartment lighting  
1 Undo the two screws and remove the  
lamp glass.  
2 Withdraw the bulb.  
3 Change the bulb.  
4 Check the seal before fitting the glass.  
1 Slidethelampfittingforwardandpullout  
the back.  
2 Remove the bulb.  
3 Change the bulb.  
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the  
lamp fitting engages the edge of the open-  
ing in the body panel.  
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the  
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease  
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.  
2 Bend out one of the contacts and  
remove the bulb.  
3 Change the bulb.  
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the  
lamp fitting first.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 225  
Dome light, front  
Dome light, rear  
Glove-compartment illumination  
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out  
of the overhead panel.  
2 Releaseoneofthecontactsandremove  
the bulb.  
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:  
ease out the trailing end first, and then  
both front edges.  
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in  
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out  
to gain access to the bulb.  
2 Bend out one of the contacts and  
remove the bulb.  
2 Fit the new bulb.  
3 Fit the new bulb.  
3 Fit the new bulb.  
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the  
lamp fitting first.  
Other bulbs  
If any other bulbs need changing, you are  
advised to take the car to an authorized  
Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
Car care and technical information  
Bulb table  
1
7
#
1
2
3
Cap  
H7  
H1  
Wattage  
55  
55  
21  
Headlight  
Fog light  
Reversinglamp;sidereversinglamp;  
rear fog lamp; cornering lamp  
Stop/tail lamp  
Direction indicator, front/rear  
Dome light; courtesy lights; glove  
compartment;luggagecompartment  
Safety belt reminder  
P21W  
2
3
4
5
6
8
4
5
6
P21/5W 21/5  
P21W  
R10W  
21  
10  
9
7
8
R5W  
Xenon  
w9U  
5
6
Reading light, overhead panel  
10  
11  
9
T4W  
4
5
Reading light, rear  
10 WY5W/  
W5W  
Side indicators (yellow);/  
High-mountedstoplight(9-5Sedan);  
parking lights; license plate illumina-  
tion  
11 W2W  
1,2  
Switches; front ashtray  
NOTICE  
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage  
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.  
A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an  
accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is pro-  
vided adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage  
compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 227  
Fuses  
WARNING  
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or  
fire breaking out in the electrical system,  
the following advice should be heeded:  
Sound fuse / Blown fuse  
• Always consult an authorized Saab  
dealer before modifying or adding any  
electrical equipment. Failure to do so  
can result in the electrical system  
being damaged.  
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:  
oneattheendoftheinstrumentpanelonthe  
driver’s side, and one under the hood.  
Fuse panel in instrument panel  
Fuse box under the hood  
• Never replace a fuse with one having  
a higher/lower rating than specified  
(see page 229). The color of the fuse  
indicates its amperage.  
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it  
from the panel (see below). If the filament is  
broken, the fuse has blown.  
A specialtoolfor removingfusesisprovided  
at the bottom of the fuse panel. Simply push  
the tool onto the fuse, squeeze and remove  
the fuse.  
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,  
have the electrical system checked by  
an authorized Saab dealer.  
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that  
there is a major fault in the electrical  
system. Have the car checked by an  
authorized Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
228  
Car care and technical information  
The DICE and TWICE control modules are  
linked to a data bus, which is basically an  
informationcarrierthatallowsinformationto  
be exchanged between all the control mod-  
ules and components connected to the bus.  
If a fault occurs inany of thesecomponents,  
diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-  
vant control module, which facilitates fault  
diagnosis at the Saab dealer.  
DICE / TWICE  
DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-  
tronics  
TWICE=Theft-WarningCentralElectronics  
DICE and TWICE are electronic control  
modules that monitor and control a variety  
of functions, including:  
DICE controls (among other things):  
• Front lights and interior lighting  
• Instrument illumination  
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis  
is located under the instrument panelon the  
drivers side.  
• Intermittent wiper operation  
• Electric heating of rear window and door  
mirrors  
• Cooling fans  
Maxi fuses under the hood  
TWICE controls (among other things):  
• Central locking.  
Maxi fuses  
• Car alarm (Anti-theft system)  
• Engine immobilizer  
• Autochecking of lights.  
• Electric heating of rear seat  
• Safety belt reminder  
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box  
under the hood. These fuses can be  
checked in the sameway as the other fuses.  
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the  
car’s electrical system from being dam-  
aged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of  
electrical circuits and functions and there-  
forehasahigherrating(amperage)thanthe  
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are  
supplied with the car.  
• Electrically adjustable passenger seat  
NOTICE  
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there is  
a major fault in the electrical system.  
Have the carcheckedwithoutdelay by an  
authorized Saab dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 229  
7
8
10  
15  
Engine injectors  
Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting, circulation  
pump; parking assistant; SID  
A B C  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
16B  
17  
15  
15  
30  
Audio System; CD changer  
Heating, rear seat; sunroof, remote control receiver  
Electrically adjusted passenger seat  
14  
15 16  
6B 7  
8
9
10 11 12 13  
16B17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24  
25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
32 33 34 35 36  
7.5 Automatic transmission  
20  
Audio System, amplifier  
Ignition system, engine  
Fuel pump  
30  
20  
20  
37 38 39  
DICE (direction indicators)  
20  
Engine-management system; main instrument;  
DICE/TWICE  
Fuse panel in instrument panel  
Amp Function  
18  
19  
20  
21  
40  
10  
15  
10  
Door-mirror heating; rear-window heating  
OnStar; Telematics  
#
A
30  
10  
Trailer lights  
ACC; interior lighting;rear fog light; high beam flasher  
B
C
Automatic transmission  
Audio System; rear-view mirror; load angle sensor  
(cars with xenon); navigation (accessory); Cruise  
Control  
7.5 Electric door mirrors; DICE: manual beam length  
adjustment  
1
15  
Brake lights  
22  
23  
40  
15  
Interior fan  
2
15  
10  
10  
Reversing lights  
Parking lights, left  
Parking lights, right  
Central locking; navigation (accessory); door mirror  
memory  
3
4
24  
25  
26  
40  
30  
Air pump (3.0t V6 only)  
5
7.5 DICE / TWICE  
30 Electric windows, right; trailer charging  
7.5 Brake lights, trailer  
Electrically adjustable driver’s seat; fuel-filler flap  
6
7,5 Driver seat memory; mirrors memory; sunroof; park-  
ing assistant; seatbelt reminder  
6B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230  
Car care and technical information  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
10  
Engine-management system; SID; main instrument  
7.5 Airbag  
A
7.5 ABS/TCS/ESP  
7.5 Starter motor  
C1  
L1  
C2  
L2  
B
D
G
7.5 Cruise control; water valve; fog lights, front; rain sen-  
sor  
E
H
K
F
I
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
15  
Ventilated front seats  
7.5 Direction-indicator switch  
J
30  
Cigarette lighter (front/rear)  
Daytime running light  
Electric windows, left  
Windshield wipers  
15  
30  
30  
30  
20  
Electric heating, front seats  
Relay panel under instrument panel (cont.)  
Limp-home solenoid (automatic transmission);  
OnStar; telematics  
C2  
D
E
Relay panel under instrument panel  
Main relay (engine management system)  
#
A
Function  
F
Fuel filler flap  
G
H
I
Fuel pump  
B
Electric heating of rear seat  
Ignition switch  
C1  
Rear-window / door mirrors heating  
J
K
Starter relay  
Limp-home function  
Bootlid  
L1  
L2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 231  
Fuse box under hood  
Fuses  
#
Amp Function  
2
3
4
7
1
1
40 Radiator fan, high speed  
60 ABS/TCS/ESP  
2
3
6
8
5
1
2
9
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
4
7.5 Load angle sensor (cars with xenon headlights)  
15 Heater  
13  
5
3
4
5
6
9
12  
15  
16  
17  
6
10 A/C; car alarm siren  
15 Bulb test  
7
8
10 13  
11 14  
17  
7
8
9
20 Headlight washers  
15 High beam headlight, left  
15 Low beam headlight left  
15 High beam headlight, right  
15 Low beam headlight, right  
30 Radiator fan, high speed  
15 Fog lights (front spoiler)  
30 Wiper, rear  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Relays  
#
1
Function  
Bulb test; head light; high beam flasher  
Headlight washer  
Front fog lights  
2
3
4
Wiper, rear (9-5 Wagon)  
5
15 Horn  
6
7
Rain sensor  
8
Radiator fan, low speed  
Radiator fan, high speed  
A/C-compressor  
9
10  
11  
Radiator fan, high speed, right fan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
Car care and technical information  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Horn  
Extra lights (accessory)  
High beam headlight  
Low beam headlight  
Windshield wipers  
Location of wallet for spare bulbs and  
fuses (accessory)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 233  
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current  
load and speed of the car (see page 279).  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires  
TheTire-LoadingInformationlabel,whichis  
on the inside of the trunk lid, shows the cor-  
rect inflation pressures for your tires when  
they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has  
been sitting for at least threehours or driven  
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that  
underinflation or overinflation is all  
right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have  
enough air (underinflation), you can get  
the following:  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality  
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If  
you ever have questions about your tire  
warranty and where to obtain service, see  
your Saab Warranty and Service Record  
Booklet for details.  
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,  
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as  
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure  
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.  
during highway driving) by approximately  
0.3 bar (4 psi). When thetemperatureof the  
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-  
sure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).  
WARNING  
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe  
tires are hot when you check them, only  
increase the pressure, if necessary.  
Poor maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Bad wear  
Bad handling  
Bad fuel economy  
• Overloading your tires can cause  
overheating as a result of too much  
friction. You could have an air-out and  
aseriousaccident. SeeLoadingYour  
Vehicle” on page 242.  
• Underinflated tires pose the same  
danger as overloaded tires. The  
resultingaccidentcouldcauseserious  
injury. Check all tires frequently to  
maintain the recommended pressure.  
Tire pressure should be checked  
when your tires are cold.  
If your tires have too much air (overinfla-  
tion), you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Bad handling  
Rough ride  
Needless damage from road hazards  
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be  
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden  
impact – such as when you hit a pot-  
hole. Keep tires at the recommended  
pressure.  
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If  
yourtreadisbadly worn, or if yourtires  
have been damaged, replace them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
234  
Car care and technical information  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the  
front and rear inflation pressures as shown  
ontheTire-LoadingInformationlabel. Make  
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-  
ened. See page 250.  
When to check  
Check your tires once a month or more.  
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It  
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).  
Flat spotting  
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys  
or when the car is driven hard. After the car  
has been parked with hot tires and the tires  
havecooleddown,aflatspotcanforminthe  
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.  
The same can occur if the car has not been  
moved for a long time.  
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be  
felt through the steering wheel, similar to  
that experiencedwhenthewheels needbal-  
ancing.  
How to Check  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to  
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your  
tires are properly inflated simply by looking  
at them. Radial tires may look properly  
inflated even when they’re underinflated.  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the  
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by  
keeping out dirt and moisture.  
WARNING  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel  
could come off and cause an accident.  
When you change a wheel, remove any  
rust or dirt from places where the wheel  
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,  
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do  
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire  
brush later, if you need to, to get all the  
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a wheel” on  
page 247.  
Flat spots of this type disappear once the  
tiresgethotagain,usuallyafter10–15 miles  
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles  
(12 500 km).  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate  
your tires as soon as possible and check  
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged  
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for  
New Tires” on page 235 and “Wheel  
Replacement” on page 238 for more infor-  
mation.  
Thepurposeofregularrotationistoachieve  
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-  
cle. The first rotation is the most important.  
When rotating your tires, always use the  
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left  
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to  
right rear. Right rear to left front.  
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your  
tire rotation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 235  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
Buying New Tires  
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is  
tocheckthetreadwearindicators, whichwill  
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.  
You need a new tire if any of the following  
statements are true:  
To find out what kind and size of tires you  
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information  
label.  
The tires installed on your vehicle when it  
was new had a Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification (TPC Spec) number on each  
tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get  
ones with that same TPC Spec number.  
That way your vehicle will continue to have  
tires that are designed to give proper endur-  
ance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride  
and other things during normal service on  
yourvehicle. Ifyour tires haveanall-season  
tread design, the TPC number will be fol-  
lowed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).  
If you ever replace your tires with those not  
havingaTPCSpecnumber,makesurethey  
are the same size, load range, speed rating  
and construction type (bias, bias-belted or  
radial) as your original tires.  
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than  
those supplied with the car, consult your  
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities  
available.  
Wheels/tires combinations that are not  
approved by Saab can negatively affect the  
car’s directional stability, steering and brak-  
ing in both wet and dry conditions.  
You can see the indicators at three or  
more places around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing  
through the tire’s rubber.  
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or  
snagged deep enough to show cord or  
fabric.  
Wear indicators  
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.  
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other  
damage that can’t be repaired well  
because of thesizeorlocationof the dam-  
age.  
Treadwear indicators  
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the  
form of smooth, treadless strips across the  
width, which become visible when only  
2/32"(1.6 mm)oftreadremains. Assoonas  
the indicators become visible, new tires  
should be fitted without delay.  
Make sure you are familiar with the legal  
limit for minimum tread depth in your  
country and also any regulations gov-  
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
236  
Car care and technical information  
The wheels and tires have been carefully  
matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand  
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-  
ing and handling.  
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire  
combination will work in the best possible  
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.  
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-  
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed  
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.  
Contact a Saab dealer.  
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires  
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New  
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that  
tires on the same axle have the same  
amount of tread.  
NOTICE  
WARNING  
Always consult your Saab dealer before  
changing the wheels and tires on your  
Saab.  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose con-  
trol while driving. If you mix tires of differ-  
ent sizes or types (radial and bias-belted  
tires), the vehicle may not handle prop-  
erly, and you could have a crash. Using  
tires of different sizes may also cause  
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use  
thesamesizeandtypetiresonallwheels.  
It’s all right to drive with your compact  
spare temporarily, it was developed for  
use on your vehicle. See “Compact spare  
tire” on page 246.  
Wide wheels and tires with sidewalls that  
are too low can:  
• be damaged in potholes etc.  
• cause springs, shock absorbers and  
wheel bearings and body mountings  
can be overloaded.  
• cause that the wheels can come into  
contact with chassis and body compo-  
nents.  
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never  
standing upright.  
• can affect the function of the Elec-  
tronic Stability Program (ESP).  
WARNING  
The speed and load limits for the tires  
must not be exceeded; see page 241.  
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,  
the wheel rim flanges could develop  
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire  
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing  
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the  
wheels on your vehicle.  
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.  
The maximum permissible offset is  
49 mm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 237  
Treadwear  
Temperature – A, B, C  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
The treadwear grade is a comparative  
rating based on the wear rate of the tire  
when tested under controlled conditions on  
a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-  
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-  
tive performance of tires depends upon the  
actual conditions of their use, however, and  
may depart significantly from the norm due  
to variations in driving habits, service prac-  
tices and differences in road characteristics  
and climate.  
The temperaturegrades areA (the highest),  
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance  
tothegeneration of heatand itsability to dis-  
sipate heat when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can  
cause the material of the tire to degenerate  
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-  
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The  
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-  
mance which all passenger car tires must  
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A  
represent higher levels of performance on  
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum  
required by law.  
Quality grades can be found where applica-  
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-  
der and maximum section width. For exam-  
ple:  
Treadwear 200TractionAA Temperature  
A
The following information relates to the  
system developed by the United States  
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-  
tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-  
tion and temperature performance. (This  
applies only to vehicles sold in the United  
States.) The grades are molded on the side-  
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-  
form Tire Quality Grading system does not  
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,  
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12  
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-  
duction tires.  
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary  
withrespecttothesegrades, they mustalso  
conform to federal safety requirements and  
additional General Motors Tire Perfor-  
mance Criteria (TPC) standards.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,  
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-  
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-  
ment as measured under controlled condi-  
tions on specified government test surfaces  
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance. Warn-  
ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire  
is based on straight-ahead braking traction  
tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction  
characteristics.  
Warning:Thetemperaturegradeforthistire  
is established for a tire that is properly  
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive  
speed, underinflation, orexcessiveloading,  
either separately or in combination, can  
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
238  
Car care and technical information  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
Used Replacement Wheels  
WARNING  
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned  
and balanced carefully at the factory to give  
you the longest tire life and best overall per-  
formance.  
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-  
ancing are not needed. However, if you  
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-  
ing one way or the other, the alignment may  
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle  
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,  
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.  
WARNING  
Using the wrong replacement wheels,  
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle  
can be dangerous. It could affect the  
braking and handling of your vehicle,  
make your tires lose air and make you  
lose control. You could have a collision in  
which you or others could be injured.  
Alwaysusethecorrectwheel, wheelbolts  
and wheel nuts for replacement.  
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been  
used or how far it’s been driven. It could  
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you  
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM  
original equipment wheel.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or  
badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep  
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and  
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel  
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum  
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).  
See your dealer if any of these conditions  
exist.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause  
problems with bearing life, brake cool-  
ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-  
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-  
cle ground clearance and tire or tire  
chain clearance to the body and chassis.  
See “Changing a wheel” on page 247.  
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you  
need.  
WARNING  
Each new wheel should have the same  
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,  
offset and be mounted the same way as the  
one it replaces.  
If you need to replace any of your wheels,  
wheelboltsorwheelnuts, replacethemonly  
with new Saab original equipment parts.  
This way, you will be sure to have the right  
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your  
vehicle.  
When fitting just one new pair of tires,  
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,  
as these are more critical to the direc-  
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking  
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels  
should therefore be moved to the front.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 239  
Notice: If your vehicle does not have  
If a Tire Goes Flat  
Tire Chains  
P225/45R17 size tires, use tire chains  
only where legal and only when you  
must. Use only SAE Class ²S² type  
chains that are the proper size for your  
tires. Install them on the front tires and  
tighten them as tightly as possible with  
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly  
and follow the chain manufacturer’s  
instructions. If you can hear the chains  
contacting your vehicle, stop and  
retighten them. If the contact continues,  
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast  
or spinning the wheels with chains on  
will damage your vehicle.  
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while  
you’re driving, especially if you maintain  
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,  
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But  
ifyoushouldeverhaveablowout”, hereare  
a few tips about what to expect and what to  
do:  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a  
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.  
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and  
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-  
tain lane position, and then gently brake to  
a stop well out of the traffic lane.  
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts  
much like a skid and may require the same  
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear  
blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-  
ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by  
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.  
Itmaybeverybumpyandnoisy,butyoucan  
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off  
the road if possible.  
WARNING  
IfyourvehiclehasP225/45R17sizetires,  
don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough  
clearance.  
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the  
proper amount of clearance can cause  
damage to the brakes, suspension or  
othervehicleparts.Theareadamagedby  
the tire chains could cause you to lose  
control of your vehicle and you or others  
may be injured in a crash.  
Use another type of traction device only if  
its manufacturer recommends it for use  
on your vehicle and tire size combination  
and road conditions. Follow that manu-  
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid  
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,  
readjust or remove the device if it’s con-  
tacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your  
wheels.  
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to  
use your jacking equipment to change a flat  
tire safely.  
If you do find traction devices that will fit,  
install them on the front tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
Car care and technical information  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):  
Tire manufacturers are required to grade  
tires based on performance factors: tread-  
wear, traction and temperature resistance.  
For more information see “Uniform Tire  
Quality Grading” on page 237.  
Maximum ColdInflation Load Limit: Max-  
imum load that can be carried and the max-  
imum pressure needed to support that load.  
For information on recommended tire pres-  
sure see “Lowest recommended tire pres-  
sure, cold tires” on page 279and “Loading  
Your Vehicle” on page 242.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded  
into it´s sidewall.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example  
of a typical passenger car tire size.  
Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a partic-  
ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-  
struction type and service description.  
Department of Transportation (DOT):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT)  
code indicates that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation  
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-  
ters and numbers following DOT code are  
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The  
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant  
code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-  
factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides  
of the tire.  
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under  
the tread.  
P
215 / 55  
R
16 93  
H
|
|
|
|
|
|
f
|
a
b
c
d
e
g
a Passenger (P-Metric) Tire  
b Tire Width  
c Aspect Ratio  
d Belt Rating  
e Rim diameter  
f Load range  
g Speed rating  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United  
States versionofa metric tiresizing system.  
The letter “P” as the first character in the tire  
size means a passenger vehicle tire engi-  
neered to standards set by the U.S Tire and  
Rim Association.  
Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-  
cates the tire section width in millimeters  
from sidewall to sidewall.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 241  
Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-  
cates the tire height-to-width measure-  
ments. For example, if the tire size aspect  
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-  
tration, it would meanthat the tire´s sidewall  
is 55% as high as it is wide.  
Tire markings  
An example of the meaning of the different  
markings in a tire size is given below for a  
tire size of:  
215/55 R16 93 V  
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate  
the type of ply construction in the tire. The  
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the  
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-  
struction; and the letter “B” means  
215 Tire section width, mm  
55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height  
is 65 % of the section width  
TIN-code  
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark  
b Tire Size  
R Radial ply  
belted-bias ply construction.  
16 Wheel rim diameter 15 in at bead  
seats  
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in  
inches.  
Load range:Theload range representsthe  
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.  
c Tire Type Code  
d Date of Manufacture  
93 Tire load code  
V Speed marking  
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a  
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings  
range from “A” to “Z”.  
Tyre load index  
91 max 1366 lbs (615 kg)  
93 max 1433 lbs (650 kg)  
94 max 1477 lbs (670 kg)  
Speed ratings  
S up to 100 mph (180 km/h)  
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)  
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)  
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)  
W up to 167 mph (270 km/h)  
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
242  
Car care and technical information  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the  
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in  
compliance with the U.S. Department of  
Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-  
dards. The DOT code includes the Tire  
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-  
meric designator which can also indentify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant,  
brand and date of production.  
Loading Your Vehicle  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the  
tirepressingoutwardoneachsquareinchof  
thetire. Airpressureis expressedinpounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
Accessory Weight: This means the com-  
bined weight of optional accessories, for  
example, automatic transmission, power  
steering, power brakes, power windows,  
power seats, radio and air conditioning.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see  
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 242.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s  
height to its width.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for  
the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”  
on page 242.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for  
therearaxle, seeLoadingYourVehicleon  
page 242.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of  
an asymmetrical tire that must always face  
outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is  
located between the plies and the tread.  
Cords may be made from steel or other rein-  
forcecing materials.  
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the  
ply cords that extendto the beads are laidat  
alternate angles substantially less than 90  
degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
Cold Inflation Pressure: Theamount of air  
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per  
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before  
a tire have built up heat from driving. See  
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 233.  
Curb weight: This means the weight of a  
motor vehicle with standard and optional  
equipment including the maximum capacity  
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers  
and cargo.  
This is an example of what your vehicle´s  
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label  
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar  
and shows how much weight your vehicle  
may properly carry. The label tells you the  
proper size, and recommended inflation  
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It  
also gives you important information about  
the number of people that can be in your  
vehicle and the total weight that you can  
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle  
CapacityWeight, andincludesthe weightof  
all occupants, cargo and all nonfac-  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air  
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used  
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose  
passenger vehicles.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging  
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load  
carrying capacity of a tire.  
tory-installed options.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 243  
Maximum Load rating: The load rating for  
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation  
pressure for that tire.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The  
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-  
cle capacity weight; and production options  
weight.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-  
sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure  
to which a tire may be inflated.  
Normal occupant weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-  
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading  
Your Vehicle” on page 242.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehi-  
Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.  
cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-  
tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see  
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 233 and  
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 242.  
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-  
dards, a tire information system that pro-  
vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s  
traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-  
ings are determined by tire manufacturers  
using government testing procedures. The  
rating are molded into the sidewall of the  
tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on  
page 237.  
VehicleCapacityWeight:Isthenumber of  
designated seating positions multipled by  
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo  
load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on page  
242.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load  
on an individual tire due to curb weight,  
accessory weight, occupant weight and  
cargo weight.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently  
attached to a vehicle showing original  
equipment tire size and the recommended  
cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your  
Vehicle” on page 242.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which  
the ply cords that extend to the beads are  
laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen-  
terline of the tread.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and  
tube assembly upon which the tire beads  
are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the  
tread and the bead.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-  
ing positions.  
Speed rating: An alphanumeric code  
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum  
speed at which a tire can operate.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and  
the road surface. The amount of grip pro-  
vided.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,  
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show  
across the tread of a tire when only  
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is  
Time for New Tires” on page 235.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side  
that facesoutward whenmounted on avehi-  
cle. The sideof thetire that contains a white-  
wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-  
turer, brand and or model name molding on  
the other sidewall of the tire.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks  
and multipurpose vehicles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
Car care and technical information  
Steps for Determining Correct Load  
Limit  
5 Determine the combined weight of  
luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not  
safely exceed the available cargo  
and luggage load capacity calcu-  
lated in Step 4.  
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,  
load from your trailer will be trans-  
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this  
reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of your vehi-  
cle.  
Winter tires  
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for  
winter climates where the majority of your  
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter  
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to  
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab  
dealer can advise you of to the correct size  
tire for your car (if different from the original  
size) and also supply Saab approved winter  
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.  
1 Locate the statement “The  
combined weight of occupants and  
cargo should never exceed  
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s  
placard.  
2 Determine the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers that will  
be riding in your vehicle.  
3 Substract the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers from  
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.  
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-  
able amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the  
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers  
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-  
able cargo and luggage load capac-  
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =  
650 lbs.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 245  
Tire date code  
Tires should be regarded as perishable  
goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes  
progressively harder, and the roadholding  
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-  
ularly true on winter tires.  
Tires now have a date-code marking for the  
year of manufacture. The first two digits  
denote the week number and the two last  
digits the year. The ”<” symbol points to the  
year.  
Accordingly, a date code of 0200 signifies  
that the tire was manufactured in week 02,  
2000.  
Tire date code  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
Car care and technical information  
Spare wheel (under panel in luggage  
compartment)  
Panel hooked back, 9-5 Sedan  
Hanging up the cover and spare wheel  
compartments mats, 9-5 Wagon  
The spare tire, together with the jack, front  
towrope attachment eye and toolkit, is  
stowed away underneath a panel in the lug-  
gage-compartment floor. The jack handle is  
kept in a cover beside the spare tire.  
If you need to change a wheel, remove the  
tool kit first and then the spare tire.  
The panel over the spare tire can be held  
open by hooking the handle onto the rubber  
seal.  
In the Saab 9-5 Sedan the warning triangle  
issecuredtotheluggagecompartmenttrim.  
In the Saab 9-5 Wagon, there is space for a  
warningtriangleunderneaththepanelinthe  
luggage compartment floor.  
NOTICE  
Compact spare tire  
The compact spare is light and easy to  
handle when changing the tire. Its use is  
only permittedwhen astandard tirehas sus-  
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the  
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).  
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy  
wheel it can be placed outside up in the  
spare-wheel well but only while driving to  
the closest dealer.  
A general rule is that all heavy loads must  
be well secured in the luggage compart-  
ment, see page 137 and 140.  
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the  
compact spare fitted.  
The compact spare should be inflated to  
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the puncturedtirein  
the spare-wheel well under the luggage-  
compartment floor.  
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted  
as soon as possible (see also page 187).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 247  
Changing a wheel  
WARNING  
• Stow the jack in the place provided for  
it under the panel in the floor of the  
trunk.Secureitproperlytoavoidinjury  
to passengers in the event of a crash.  
• The car jack is designed solely for use  
in changing a wheel or fitting snow  
chains. It must not be used to sup-  
port the car during repair work or  
servicing.  
• Do not use the jack for any purpose  
other than for jacking up the car.  
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner  
threadsofthewheelboltsifthecarhas  
been driven for several years exclu-  
sively with alloy wheels.  
If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt  
hole threads in the brake hubs should  
be cleaned before the thinner steel  
wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not  
be possible to achieve the required  
clamping force despite tightening the  
bolts to the correct torque.  
Never crawl under a car that is  
supported only by a jack.  
• Special caremust be takenif the car is  
on a slope – use wheel chocks!  
• Position chocks, one ahead and one  
behind, the wheel that is diagonally  
opposite to the one to be changed.  
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if  
the car is on a road.  
• Apply the parking brake and leave the  
car in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic  
transmission: move selector to the  
P position.  
• Ensure thateverybodyisout of the car  
before jacking it up.  
• Never start the engine while the car is  
jacked up.  
• The jack must stand on a firm, level  
surface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
248  
Car care and technical information  
Jack location, between spare wheel and  
sill  
Position for jack  
The collapsible jack handle is stowed in a cloth bag by the spare wheel. With the help of  
your foot, extend the handle as illustrated  
Positioning the jack  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 249  
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of  
the special jacking points under the sills.  
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the  
standard jacking points used by the dealer.  
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both  
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.  
A jack stand must then be applied under-  
neath the front of the engine subframe (at  
the fixing point for the towrope-attachment  
eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye  
(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).  
NOTICE  
Apply the jack only to the jacking points  
indicated on the body.  
Jacking points for a trolley jack  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
Car care and technical information  
NOTICE  
• When refitting wheel covers (where  
applicable), make sure that the valve  
protrudes through the marked hole in  
the wheel cover.  
• Do not overtighten the bolts using an  
impact wrench: not only can this  
damage the wheels but it can also  
make it impossible to undo the bolts  
using the wheel wrench in the car’s  
toolkit.  
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-  
faces between the wheel and brake disc  
Do not wipe away the grease in the hub.  
8 Check-tightenthewheelboltsafterafew  
miles.  
Tightening torque  
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the  
hub.  
6 Fitthewheelandscrewintheboltsinthe  
sequence shown (opposite pairs).  
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts  
and wheel to be seated correctly.  
7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel  
bolts to the correct torque in the  
sequence shown (opposite pairs).  
Tightening torque  
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-  
mission:moveselectortothePposition)  
and apply the parking brake.  
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height  
before placing it under the recess in the  
sill.  
Make sure that the jack fully engages  
the recess in the sill and that the base of  
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.  
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)  
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)  
3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-  
cable).  
Loosen the wheel bolts by half a turn.  
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of  
theground.Removethewheelboltsand  
lift off the wheel.  
5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact  
surfaces between the wheel and brake  
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)  
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)  
Do not overtighten the bolts using an  
impact wrench: not only can this  
damage the wheels but it can also make  
it impossible to undo the bolts using the  
wheel wrench in the car’s toolkit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 251  
I
 0
I5B39  
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts  
Removing the wheel cover  
WARNING  
Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner  
threads if the car has been driven for sev-  
eral years exclusively with alloy wheels.  
Ifsteelwheels arenow fitted, the bolt hole  
threads in the brake hubs should be  
cleaned before the thinner steel wheels  
are fitted. It may otherwise not be possi-  
bletoachievetherequiredclampingforce  
despite tightening the bolts to the correct  
torque.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Car care and technical information  
Fault diagnosis  
Maintenance  
Air conditioning  
(ACC)  
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are  
a number of checks you can perform your-  
self. If the fault persists, however, have the  
system checked by an authorized Saab  
dealer.  
• The drive belt for the compressor should  
be inspected under the regular service  
program.  
• Clean dirt and insects away from the con-  
denser and radiator to prevent clogging.  
When washing the car, use the hose to  
spraytheradiatorandcondenser(located  
forward of the radiator) from both sides  
(both from the front of the car and from  
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-  
sure washer.  
Caution: Do not use the hose when the  
engine is hot.  
Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot  
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this  
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.  
WARNING  
Important!  
• AllrepairsandadjustmentsontheA/C  
system must be carried out by a Saab  
dealer authorized for this kind of work.  
When the A/C system is running, the intake  
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-  
densation is drained off through two outlets  
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity  
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly  
normal for water to be seen dripping from  
these outlets when the car is parked. The  
warmer the ambient air and the higher the  
humidity, the greater will be the amount of  
condensation formed.  
• The A/Csystemispressurized. Do not  
break any connections or undo A/C  
system components.  
• Escaping refrigerant gas can cause  
visual impairment or other injury.  
Inadequate cooling:  
Note: The A/C system will only operate  
when the outdoor temperature is above the  
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).  
NOTICE  
a Check that the condenser (forward of  
the radiator) has not become clogged  
with dirt and insects.  
• The A/C system is designed for use  
with R134a refrigerant.  
b Makesure thatthe drive belt for thecom-  
pressor is not slipping.  
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans  
and compressor.  
• Refrigerant handling requires special  
equipment and special procedures for  
charging and draining the system.  
• Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-  
ants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 253  
Cleaning and caring for leather  
upholstery  
Safety belts  
Upholstery and trim  
To remove fluff or hairs from the seat uphol-  
stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free  
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or  
roller). Remove any dirty marks using a  
cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy  
water.  
The principal reason for treating leather  
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-  
ance and to provide it with a protective film.  
Discoloration caused by dust and wear  
mainly affects the lighter shades, although  
this is not detrimental to the leather –  
indeed,thepatinaresultingfromuseisoften  
considered desirable in leather. But if the  
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it  
can start to look shabby.  
WARNING  
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety  
belts, belt pretensioners and other com-  
ponents must be inspected by an autho-  
rized Saab dealer.  
When using a stain remover, always work  
from the outside towards thecenter to avoid  
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should  
remain, it can usually be removed using  
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.  
Never make any alterations or repairs to  
the safety belt yourself.  
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the  
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a  
generalspring-cleaningofthecarafterthe  
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In  
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be  
treated more frequently. Recommended  
conditioner – Saab Leather Care Lotion.  
Do not use unknown harsh polishing  
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse  
soap or hot water.  
Regularly check the function of the safety  
belts as follows:  
Wetpatchesleft by spilt softdrinks or thinoil  
must be wiped off immediately using an  
absorbent material, such as kitchen paper,  
and treated with stain remover.  
Alcohol is recommended for removing  
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush  
may also be used.  
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull itsharply.  
The safety belt should lock and it should  
not be possible to withdraw it further.  
Check the anchorage points in the floor.  
They must not have suffered rust damage.  
There must be no frayed threads in the web-  
bing.  
Safety belts must not come intocontactwith  
substances such as polishes, oils or other  
chemicals. If the straps aredirty, washthem  
with warm water and a detergent or have  
them replaced.  
Textile carpeting  
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-  
pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or  
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do  
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless  
they are properly grounded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
254  
Car care and technical information  
The underside of the car also needs wash-  
ing regularly, and this should be done extra  
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the  
undersideofthecar byhand if the caris usu-  
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-  
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.  
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the  
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather  
immediately after washing to avoid smears  
and streaks.  
Cleanthewindowglassinsideandoutusing  
a high quality window cleaner. This is partic-  
ularly important when the car is new, as  
upholstery and trim have a tendency to  
sweat a little at first.  
Keeptheglasswellcleaned, as this helps to  
prevent misting.  
Washing the car  
NOTICE  
Wash your car frequently. To facilitate  
cleaning, a suitable detergent canbeadded  
to the water, which should be lukewarm.  
• The door mirrors must be fully  
retracted before the car enters an  
automatic car wash.  
Do not use a pressure washer at close  
range on stone chip damage, scratches or  
other damage to the paintwork. The paint  
can otherwise start to flake.  
Remove any bird droppings without delay,  
as these can discolor the paintwork and  
prove difficult to polish out.  
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-  
hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do  
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry  
out the paintwork.  
• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for  
mobile phone, before putting car  
through an automatic car wash.  
• Tryyourbrakesonleavingacar wash.  
Wet brake discs may reduce the per-  
formance of the brakes.  
• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:  
Do not spray the sensors or closer  
than 20 cm to the sensors with a pres-  
sure washer, as this can damage  
them.  
NOTICE  
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners  
on the front and rear light clusters, as  
these can cause cracking of the lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 255  
If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a  
Waxing and polishing  
Touching up the paint  
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed  
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-  
ble, the damaged area should be taken  
back to the bare metal. The metal should  
then be primed with two thin coats of primer  
applied by brush.  
Other than in exceptional cases, do not use  
abrasivepolishescontainingacuttingagent  
on a new car. Always wash the car thor-  
oughly before waxing or polishing.  
Damaged paintwork should be treated as  
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,  
the greater the risk of corrosion. The  
anti-perforation warranty does not cover  
corrosion resulting from untreated defects.  
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is  
usually extensive and can only be properly  
restored by professionals.  
However, you can repair small scratches  
and stone-chip damage yourself. The nec-  
essary tools and materials, such as primer,  
touch-up paint and brushes, are available  
from your Saab dealer.  
Engine compartment  
Aftertheprimerhasdried,applyseveralthin  
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of  
the repaired area is flush with the surround-  
ing paintwork.  
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thor-  
oughly before use and allow each coat to  
dry before applying the next.  
Clean the engine compartment using an  
engine detergent and rinse with hot water.  
Cover the headlights. Do not use high-pres-  
sure washer. Avoid spraying the hood liner,  
as this can become heavy and hang down  
and touch the engine when the hood is  
closed.  
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or  
solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-  
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-  
ronmentally safe degreasing agents.  
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,  
where the metal has not been exposed and  
an undamaged layer of paint remains,  
touch-up paint can usually be applied  
directly, after any dirt has been scraped  
away using a pointed knife.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
256  
Car care and technical information  
Two-coat enamel  
Anti-corrosion  
treatment  
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is  
applied in two operations. The first coat, the  
base color, contains the pigment, metal  
flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists  
of a clear enamel, which provides the final  
gloss for the paintwork and protects the  
base from moisture and environmental con-  
taminants.  
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the  
factory in different stages by an electrolytic  
immersion coating and a PVC-based pro-  
tective coating to protect against corrosion  
caused by stones flung up by the wheels. A  
thin penetrating anti-rust oil is also applied  
in cavities and body members.  
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:  
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion  
treatment like painting, underbody treat-  
ment and cavity treatment, most of the body  
panel surfaces are galvanized. These  
include the hood, the doors and the under-  
body.  
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.  
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,  
the enamel. To achieve the best finish,  
apply two or three coats of primer.  
I
Surface-treatment composition  
1 Body panel  
2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm  
3 Phosphate coating  
The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-  
side of the car and inside the wheel arches  
isparticularlyexposedtoconstantwearand  
possible damage, the degree of which will  
obviously depend on driving conditions.  
4 Cathodic ED 23 µm  
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm  
6 Metallic base 15 µm  
7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Car care and technical information 257  
2 Clean the underside of the car during  
What causes rust?  
Preventive maintenance  
the winter. Use high pressure water to  
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-  
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture  
manage to penetrate the protective finish,  
and body panels may rust through if the pro-  
cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur wher-  
ever water is trapped or where the car’s  
panels are continuously damp. Damage to  
paint and undercoating by stones, gravel  
and minor crashes immediately exposes  
metal to air and moisture. Road salts used  
for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the  
car and promote rusting. Areas of the coun-  
try with high humidity have great potential  
for rust problems, especially where salt is  
used on roads or there is moist sea air.  
Industrial pollution (fallout) may also  
The following procedures are necessary to  
help protect against rusting. Refer also to  
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal  
Coverage described in the warranty book-  
let.  
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,  
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and  
in the spring.  
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaksor  
damage, and arrange for needed  
repairspromptly. Afterwashingorafter  
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-  
ing the car inspect body surfaces for  
paint damage. While checking for leaks,  
lift the floor mats and check beneath  
them. Water can collect in these areas  
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry  
any wet areas including the floor mats.  
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-  
ble.  
Use touch-up paint to repair small  
scratchesorminorfinishdamage. Areas  
where metal is exposed will rust quickly  
and MUST be repaired immediately by  
touch-up or professional repainting.  
Rust must be removed, the bare metal  
primed and painted. Major body  
damageshouldberepairedimmediately  
and new panels or exposed areas  
should be undercoated with anti- corro-  
sion material.  
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at  
least twice a year. Under adverse con-  
ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of  
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at  
least once a week. After extreme expo-  
sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced  
by a white film on the car, wash the car  
immediately. Frequent washing will pre-  
vent paint damage from acid rain and  
other airborne contaminants such as  
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of  
these contaminants are noticed on the  
car the finish should be washed immedi-  
ately.  
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car  
with water to loosenandflush off heavy  
concentrations of dirt (include the  
underbody).  
• Sponge the car with a solution of either  
a good quality car soap or mild general  
purpose (dish washing) detergent and  
water.  
damage paint and promote rusting.  
Repairs of this type are the owner’s  
responsibilityandarenot coveredunder  
warranty.  
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.  
• After washing, check and clear all  
drains in doors and body panels.  
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a  
chamois.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258  
Car care and technical information  
4 Inspect the undercoating and touch  
up if necessary. Pay particular atten-  
tion to the fenders and wheel housings,  
which are exposed to abrasion by flying  
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn  
or flaked off, the steel must be thor-  
oughly cleaned and dried before a fresh  
coat is applied. The cleaning is best  
done with a scraper and a steel wire  
brush, followed by washing with solvent.  
Apply the new coating thinly, as other-  
wise it may run off or fall off when dry.  
For long trips  
Recovery and/or  
recycling of automotive  
materials  
Before setting off on a long journey, it is  
advisable to have your car checked over by  
your Saab dealer.  
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),  
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small  
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-  
tiles. The recycling of metals has been com-  
monplace for a long time now.  
Obtain a few important items to take along  
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper  
blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like.  
You can check some points yourself before-  
hand:  
To facilitate sorting of other materials for  
recycling, plastic parts, for instance, have  
been marked to identify the precise nature  
of the plastic.  
The quantity of materials in the car that can  
be recycled or recovered depends on the  
scrappingfacilitiesindifferentcountries.EU  
legislation that comes into force in 2006 will  
require a minimum of 85 % of the total  
weight of materials to be recycled. How-  
ever, every major car salvage yard in each  
market willreceive detailsfromSaabofhow  
the highest percentage of materials can be  
reclaimed.  
• Make sure that the engine is in good con-  
dition.  
• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of  
the engine or gearbox/transmission.  
• Check the coolant and power steering  
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.  
• Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it  
shows any signs of hard wear.  
• Check the battery charge.  
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air  
pressure, including the compact spare  
wheel.  
• Check the brakes.  
• Check all bulbs.  
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and  
the jack in the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Car care and technical information 259  
To check the aim, the vehicle should be  
• The vehicle should be fully assembled  
andallotherworkstoppedwhileheadlight  
aiming is being done.  
• The vehicleshould not have anysnow, ice  
or mud attached to it.  
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed  
pressure.  
• Close all doors.  
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-  
sion.  
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle  
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will  
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps  
are aimed properly.  
Headlight aiming  
properly prepared as follows:  
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the  
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light  
colored wall or other flat surface. The  
aiming area should be darkened, this will  
improveyourabilitytoseethebeam ofthe  
low beam headlight being aimed.  
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on  
a perfectly level surface which is level all  
the way to the wall or other flat surface.  
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-  
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.  
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel  
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.  
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.  
WARNING  
Before checking/adjusting the headlight  
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid  
dangeroffingersandhandsbeinginjured  
by moving parts.  
The radiator fan can start up even when  
the engine is switched off.  
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight  
aiming system equipped with vertical  
aiming device. The aim has been preset at  
the factory and should normally not need  
further adjustments.  
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,  
the headlight aim may be affected. If you  
believe your headlights need to be  
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to  
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is  
possibleforyoutore-aimyourheadlightsas  
described in the following procedure.  
NOTICE  
To make sure that your headlights are  
aimed properly read all instructions  
before beginning. Failure to follow these  
instructions could cause damage to  
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed  
headlight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
260  
Car care and technical information  
1
2
4
3
I
I
Vertical aiming device  
1 Wall or garage door  
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.  
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.  
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches for vehicles with halogen lamps and  
3 inches for vehicles with xenon lamps.  
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-  
Aiming marker on headlight lens  
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure  
from the ground to the recorded dis-  
tance(seepoint4)anddrawahorizontal  
line the width of the vehicle.  
ment follow these steps:  
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical  
aiming device.  
2 Locate the marker on the lens.  
3 Measurethedistancefromthegroundto  
the aim marker on each lens.  
Subtract 2 inches if the vehicle is  
equipped with halogen lamps, record  
this distance.  
Subtract 3 inches if the vehicle is  
equipped with xenon lamps, record this  
distance.  
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Car care and technical information 261  
I
I
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface  
Correctly adjusted low beam  
5 Turn on the low beam headlights and  
place a piece of cardboard or equivalent  
(althoughnotdirectlyonthelens)infront  
of the headlight not being aimed. This  
should allow the beam cut-off of the  
headlight being aimed to be seen on the  
flat surface.  
6 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the  
horizontal cut-off of the headlight is  
aligned with the horizontal line on the  
wall.  
NOTICE  
Do not cover a headlight directly on the  
lens to improve beam cut-off when aim-  
ing. Covering a headlight may cause  
excessiveheatbuild-upwhichmaycause  
damage to the headlight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262  
Car care and technical information  
(This page has been left blank)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance and Information 263  
Customer  
Assistance and  
Information  
Maintenance schedule _  
Owner assistance _____  
264  
265  
Reporting Safety Defects  
(U.S.A.)_____________  
266  
266  
267  
Reporting Safety Defects  
to the Canadian  
government _________  
Vehicle Data Collection  
and Event Data  
Recorders __________  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264  
Customer Assistance and Information  
Service intervals  
Engine oil and filter changes  
Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired  
at every service point. Use only a Saab  
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils  
stated in the Specification section of this  
Owner’s Manual. The use of extra additives  
in the oil is not necessary and is not recom-  
mended, and may be harmful to turbocharg-  
ers.  
Maintenance schedule  
The maintenance schedule is comprised of  
a Check -up 30 days after retail delivery, fol-  
lowed by services at every 15,000 miles  
(24,000 km) thereafter (15,000, 30,000,  
45,000 miles/24,000, 48,000, 72,000 km  
etc.).  
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a  
service program to the purchaser/operator  
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary  
to ensure the proper emission control sys-  
tems function, safety and reliability of the  
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional  
maintenance is recommended for specific  
componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder  
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-  
nance is always good advice!  
NOTICE  
More frequent oil changes are recom-  
mended if your vehicle is operated under  
the following conditions:  
The Check-up will be done by your Saab  
dealer at no charge and should be done  
as close as possible to the scheduled 30  
days.  
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and  
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.  
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-  
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-  
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,  
throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend  
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special  
tools and technical assistance and pur-  
chase original equipment service and  
replacement parts.  
Today’s complex automobiles should only  
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable  
serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour  
best choice.  
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to  
16 km). This is particularly important  
when outside temperatures are below  
freezing.  
• Most trips include extensive idling (such  
as frequent stop-and-go driving).  
• Most trips are through dusty areas.  
Youfrequentlytowatraileroruseacarrier  
on top of your vehicle.  
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,  
police, taxi or other commercial applica-  
tions.  
If your driving habits match this description,  
have the engine oil and filter changed in-  
between normal services at 7,500 mile  
(12,000 km) intervals. The Warranties and  
Service Record Booklet has provisions to  
record extra oil changes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Assistance and Information 265  
Service record retention  
Service costs  
Owner assistance  
Service instruction coupons and record  
stubs are provided in the Saab Warranties  
and Service Record Booklet which accom-  
panies this Owner’s Manual. The coupons  
are arranged in the order that normal ser-  
viceshouldbeperformed. Theedgeofeach  
coupon is shaded to correspond to the type  
of service point:  
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-  
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-  
vice times for each service point do not  
include the labor required to replace wear  
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or  
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or  
repairs found to be necessary as a result of  
the inspections included in these times.  
Additional labor and parts will be charged  
for such work when necessary, except as  
covered under anapplicableSaab warranty  
or any optional extended service contract.  
Transmission fluid changes or suspension  
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-  
tional.  
Warranties and service problem  
assistance  
For complete information about all applica-  
ble warranties, including the New Car War-  
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-  
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation  
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-  
vice Record Booklet which accompanies  
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner  
assistance information including Saab  
RoadsideAssistance. Ifthebookletislostor  
misplaced, a new one may be ordered  
through a Saab dealer or by contacting  
Saab.  
• Striped – "Check Up"  
• Blue – Oil change/inspection service  
• Black – Major service  
Note that in Canada a combined service  
and warranty book is used, but not service  
coupons.  
In the U.S. there is a national Customer  
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.  
Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states  
is 1-800-955-9007.  
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer  
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.  
A list of authorized Saab sales and service  
dealers is available for those planning to  
travel in the United States and Canada.  
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the  
Customer Assistance Center in the country  
in which they are traveling.  
Dealer charges for general shop material,  
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-  
clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay  
also be applied to service and repair  
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and  
locality.  
When scheduled services are performed,  
your dealer will tear out the applicable  
coupon and use it to check off the opera-  
tions performed and enter it into the service  
file at the dealership. The servicing dealer’s  
stamp, along with the date and mileage at  
which the service was done, should be  
entered on the corresponding stub which  
remains in your booklet. The booklet is your  
permanent record of the services per-  
formed. It also includes a log sheet for  
unscheduled repairs.  
It is advisable to retain receipts and, if pos-  
sible, copies of shop work orders for all ser-  
vice and repair work, wherever performed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
266  
Customer Assistance and Information  
Change of Address Notification  
(U.S. and Canada)  
Reporting Safety  
Defects (U.S.A.)  
Reporting Safety  
Defects to the Canadian  
government  
Two change of address cards are provided  
at the end of the Warranties and Service  
Record Booklet. Knowing your current  
address allows Saab to contact you in the  
event of a recall or service campaign.  
Please help us keep our records up to date  
for your own peace of mind.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect  
which could cause a crash or could cause  
injury or death, you should immediately  
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-  
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.  
If you live in Canada, and believe that your  
vehicle has a safety defect, you should  
immediately notify Transport Canada, in  
addition to notifying General Motors of  
Canada Limited.  
Service information  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it  
mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat  
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,  
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.  
However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your  
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the  
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-  
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.  
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department  
ofTransportation,Washington,D.C.20590.  
You can also obtain other information about  
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.  
You may write to Transport Canada at Box  
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.  
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in  
a situation like this, we certainly hope you  
will notify us. In Canada, please call our  
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at  
1-800-263- 1999.  
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5  
car line can be ordered through the dealer.  
These are comprehensive manuals on CD  
rom, geared to use by professional techni-  
cians.  
Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for  
a listing for your model.  
Or write:  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Customer Assistance Centre,  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,  
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Customer Assistance and Information 267  
To read this information, special equipment  
Please check the OnStar subscription ser-  
vice agreement or manual for information  
on its operations and data collection.  
Vehicle Data Collection and Event  
Data Recorders  
is needed and access to the vehicle or the  
SDM is required. Saab will not access infor-  
mation about a crash event or share it with  
others other than  
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-  
cles, has a number of sophisticated com-  
puter systems that monitor and control sev-  
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.  
Your vehicleuses on-board vehicle comput-  
erstomonitoremissioncontrolcomponents  
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-  
tions for airbag deployment, to provide  
anti-lock braking and to help the driver con-  
trol the vehicle in difficult driving situations.  
Someinformation may bestoredduringreg-  
ular operations to facilitate repair of  
(a) with the consent of the vehicle owner or,  
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of  
the lessee,  
(b) in response to an official request of  
police or similar government office,  
(c) as part of Saab’s defense of litigation  
through the discovery process, or  
(d) as required by law.  
In addition, once Saab collects or receives  
data, Saab may  
(a) use the data for GM research needs,  
(b) make it available for research where  
appropriate confidentiality is to be main-  
tained and need is shown, or  
(c) share summary data which is not tied to  
a specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-  
tions for research purposes.  
detected malfunctions; other information is  
stored only in a crash or near crash event by  
computer systems commonly called event  
data recorders (EDR).  
In a crash or near crash event, computer  
systems, such as the Airbag Sensing and  
Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle  
may record information about the condition  
ofthevehicleandhowitwasoperated, such  
as engine speed, throttle position, vehicle  
speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness,  
airbag performance data, and the severity  
of acollision. These data havebeen used to  
improve vehicle crash performance and  
may be used to improve crash performance  
of future vehicles and driving safety. These  
on-board systems are somewhat like the  
data recorders on many airplanes, but they  
do not record sounds, such as conversation  
of vehicle occupants.  
Others, suchaslawenforcement, mayhave  
access to the special equipment that can  
read the information if they have access to  
the vehicle or SDM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
268  
Customer Assistance and Information  
(This page has been left blank)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications 269  
Specifications  
General______________  
Engine ______________  
Fuel_________________  
Engine oil____________  
Engine variants _______  
Electrical system______  
Drive belts ___________  
Manual gearbox_______  
Automatic transmission  
Suspension __________  
Steering _____________  
Brake system_________  
Wheels and tires ______  
Plates and labels______  
270  
272  
272  
273  
274  
275  
275  
276  
276  
277  
277  
277  
278  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
Specifications  
General  
Gross vehicle weight  
(GVW)  
Overall length, including bumpers:  
Maximum train  
weight  
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 190.0 in (4827 mm)  
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 190.1 in (4828 mm)  
Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm)  
Maximum height:  
(GVW + max. trailer  
weight)  
Maximum axle load,  
front  
Maximum axle load,  
rear  
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 58.1 in (1475 mm)  
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 59.1 in (1501 mm)  
Wheelbase _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm)  
Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight  
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.  
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.  
Ground clearance __________________ approx. 6.6 in  
(167 mm)  
Chassis number in engine bay  
Track:  
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel  
Front __________________________ 59.9in(1522mm)*)  
Rear ___________________________ 59.9in(1522mm)*)  
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 37,1 ft (11.3 m)  
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard  
3460–3780 lbs.  
tools and spare wheel) ______________ (1570–1715 kg)  
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4390–4710 lbs.  
(1990–2135 kg)  
Turning circle (measured at vehicle extrem-  
ities) ___________________________ 39,0 ft (11.9 m)  
Maximum axle load:  
Number of seats (incl. driver) _________  
5
Front ___________________________ 2590 lbs. (1175 kg)  
Rear, 9-5 Sedan___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)  
Rear, 9-5 Wagon __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)  
Weight distribution:  
*) Specified track applies to wheel sizes:  
6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16  
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40 %  
GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50 %  
Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs (100 kg)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications 271  
Trailer:  
Luggage compartment  
Volume (SAE):  
Maximum towing speed, trailer with brakes 60 mph (100 km/h)  
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft.  
(450 litres)  
Trailer with brakes _________________ Maximum weight:  
3500 lbs (1588 kg)  
9-5 Wagon, rear seat upright ________ 31.4 cu. ft.  
(890 litres)  
Trailer without brakes ______________ Maximum weight:  
1000 lbs (450 kg)  
9-5 Wagon, rear seat folded _________ 73.0 cu. ft.  
(2067 litres)  
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 110–165 lbs  
(50–75 kg)  
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:  
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by  
Saab Automobile AB.  
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and  
weights (see page 178).  
Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)  
Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm)  
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Wagon:  
Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)  
Rear seat folded __________________ 61.2 in (1732 mm)  
WARNING  
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.  
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are  
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of  
these.  
• When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure  
that it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the  
rear seat is folded down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
Specifications  
Engine  
Fuel  
4-cylinder ________________________ Four cylinders, twin  
Fuel grade ________________________ Unleaded gasoline  
AON 87–93.  
overhead cam-  
shafts, 16 valves  
and two balancer  
shafts.  
The use of fuel with an octane rating lower than that  
recommended can cause serious engine damage.  
For optimum performance Saab recom-  
mend the following fuel grades:  
Cylinder bores ___________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)  
Stroke ___________________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)  
2.3t ____________________________ AON 90  
2.3 T and 2.3Turbo ________________ AON 93 *)  
Swept volume _____________________ 139.7 cu.in  
(2.290 litres)  
*) If AON 90 is used and the ambient temperature is above  
77 – 86°F (2530°C) some decrease in engine power canoccur  
to some extent.  
Idling speed _______________________ 825 rpm (man.)  
860 rpm (aut.)  
Antifreeze_________________________ Saab-approved  
antifreeze  
Fuel-tank capacity __________________ 18.5 gal. (70 litres)  
Coolant capacity ___________________ 7.6 qts (7.4 litres)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications 273  
Engine oil  
Recommended oil viscosities  
Viscosity is a measurement of the oils thickness. The thickness  
influences, among other things, the fuel economy. For best func-  
tion Saab recommends:  
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all  
engines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill  
oils. Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental  
issues are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved  
by Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that  
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.  
For gasoline engines, SAE 0W-30 engine oil.  
Someoil companies have engineoils meeting our requirements  
(GM-LL-A-025) but with other viscosities than what we recom-  
mend as a first choice. Those engine oils are also accepted.  
Approved oils:  
All gasoline engines - Fully Synthetic Engine Oil fulfilling  
GM-LL-A-025 requirements.  
To ensure being able to take advantage of the Saab specified  
service intervals, be sure to select a fully synthetic engine oil ful-  
filling GM-LL-A-025 requirements.  
Extra engine oil additives  
Don't addanythingtoyour oil. Therecommendedoilsareallyou  
will need for good engine performance and protection.  
Servicing/Oil changes:  
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to  
use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils  
approved for your engine. Service should be done according  
to the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's  
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not  
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to  
neglecting to meet above mentioned requirements.  
At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil  
engine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to  
meet your engines specific needs. We recommend that you,  
with the help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil  
from that selection.  
Other oil companies also have engine oils approved according  
to GM specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be  
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet  
your engines requirements. You should only use oil that meets  
your engines specific requirements (GM-LL-A-025).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
274  
Specifications  
Engine variants  
When to change engine oil  
Your vehicle will display when it is time for servicing on the SID,  
based on the mileage and time since the last service.  
Under normal circumstances the service indication will come  
after:  
up to 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year.  
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that  
the right engine oil is used.  
2.3t Ecopower  
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 185 hp (136 kW)  
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm ___ 206.5 ft.lb  
(280 Nm)  
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1  
Whenthemessagefor serviceisdisplayedyouneedtohave the  
required service done as soon as possible.  
After the service your service personnel will reset the service  
indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to  
optimize the time to the next service.  
2.3T Ecopower  
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 220 hp (161 kW)  
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm____ 228.6 ft.lb  
(310 Nm)  
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1  
Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing) ____ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres)  
2.3 Turbo Ecopower  
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)  
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm  
258.0 ft.lb.  
(350 Nm)  
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications 275  
Electrical system  
Drive belts  
Voltage __________________________ 12 V  
Battery capacity ___________________ 70 Ah  
Starter motor ______________________ 1.4 kW  
Alternator rating ____________________ 140 A/14 V  
Firing order _______________________ 1–3–4–2  
Spark plugs:  
Engine variants  
Outside length  
Drive belt _________________________ 102.84 in  
(2612 mm)  
2.3t ____________________________ NGK  
BCPR 6ES-11  
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0141 in (1.05 mm)  
2.3T and 2.3 Turbo ________________ NGK  
PFR 6H-10  
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0374 in (0.95 mm)  
Drive belt  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
276  
Specifications  
Manual gearbox  
Automatic transmission  
Type ____________________________ All-synchromesh  
Type _____________________________ Electronically con-  
5-speed with final  
drive and differen-  
tial  
trolled 5-speed,  
fully automatic with  
hydraulic torque  
converter, plane-  
tary gear set and  
integral final drive  
Lock-up function in  
selectorpositions3,  
4 and 5.  
Oil ______________________________ Saab MTF 0063  
Oil capacity _______________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres)  
Oil volume (on changing) ____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres)  
Clutch type _______________________ Hydraulic, single  
dry-plate clutch of  
diaphragm-spring  
type  
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D M L  
Transmission-fluid capacity, dry transmis-  
sion (incl. torque converter and oil cooler) 7.5 qts (7 litres)  
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 27–29 / 43–47  
If fluid change required, approximately  
3.5 litres can be drained through the drain  
plug in the transmission casing  
Transmission fluid ___________________ Saab 3309 (mineral  
oil based)  
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate  
clutches, brake  
bands and one-way  
couplings  
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 29–30 / 46–48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications 277  
Suspension  
Brake system  
Spring type, front and rear ___________ Coil springs  
Maximum deflection of springs:  
Footbrake (ABS) ____________________ Hydraulic, dual-cir-  
cuit brake system.  
Diagonally split cir-  
cuit with vacuum  
servo unit. Disc  
brakes front and  
rear.EBD,seepage  
168.  
Front __________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm)  
Rear ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm)  
Dampers, front and rear _____________ Gas-filled dampers  
Steering  
Handbrake ________________________ Acts on rear wheels  
Brake fluid _________________________ DOT 4  
Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.925 qts (900 ml)  
Disc diameter:  
Steering _________________________ Power-assisted  
steering of  
rack-and-pinion  
type; telescopic  
steering-column  
shaft with universal  
joints  
Front, ventilated ___________________ 11.34 in (288 mm)  
Front, ventilated, certain variants *) ____ 12.05 in (306 mm)  
Rear, solid _______________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)  
Rear, ventilated, certain variants *) ____ 11.81 in (300 mm)  
Number of turns, lock to lock __________ 2,9  
Power-steering fluid ________________ Power-steeringfluid  
CHF 11S  
*) 15” wheel must not be used on these  
variants.  
Total friction area of brake pads:  
2
2
Front ___________________________ 36.3 in (234 cm )  
2
2
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in (100 cm )  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
278  
Specifications  
Wheels and tires  
(recommended dimensions)  
Compact spare:  
Wheel___________________________ 4 x 16  
Tire_____________________________ T115/70 R16  
Pressure_________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)  
2.3t  
2.3 Turbo  
2.3T  
Summer tires  
205/65 R15 94 V  
215/55 R16 93 V  
225/45 R17 94 W XL/RF  
Winter tires  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles  
(3500 km)  
Maximum speed __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)  
NOTICE  
205/65 R15 94 Q  
205/55 R16 91 Q  
215/55 R16 93 Q  
225/45 R17 94 Q XL/RF  
Wheel sizes  
6 x 15”  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Snow chains:  
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only  
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:  
Wheels  
Tires  
6 x 15*)_____205/65 R15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6.5 x 16_____205/55 R16 M+S or  
215/55 R16  
6,5 x 16”  
7 x 17”  
Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.  
15" wheels must not be fitted to the 2.3 Turbo and 2.3T since the size of  
the brake discs prohibits this.  
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph  
(50 km/h).  
Speed ratings and load indices, see page 241.  
Always contact an authorized Saab dealer if you wish to fit other wheels  
or tires than those fitted as standard.  
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.  
NOTICE  
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.  
Wheel offset must be 49 mm.  
Vehicles with 12.05 in (306 mm) front brake discs must not use  
15” rims.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications 279  
Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires  
1) Do not exceed posted speed limits.  
Tire size  
Load/speed  
mph (km/h)  
Front  
Rear  
1)  
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding  
air temperature.  
kPa/psi kPa/psi  
205/65 R15 94 V  
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 230/33 210/30  
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 230/33 210/30  
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 280/41 260/38  
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32  
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32  
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 290/42 270/39  
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 250/36 240/35  
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 250/36 240/35  
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 300/43 290/42  
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35  
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38  
The values for tire pressure in the table above are for tires at 68°F (20°C).  
The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during motor-  
way driving), and decrease as they cool.  
When the temperature of the tires increase or decrease by 10 degrees the  
tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease by 10 kPa/2 psi  
(0.1 bar).  
215/55 R16 93 V  
225/45 R17 94 W  
XL/RF  
205/65 R15 94 Q  
Winter tire  
for 2.3t  
205/55 R16 91 Q  
Winter tire.  
All variants.  
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35  
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38  
215/55 R16 93 Q  
Winter tire.  
All variants.  
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35  
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38  
225/45 R17 94 Q  
XL/RF  
Winter tire.  
All variants.  
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 250/36  
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 270/39 270/39  
T115/70 R16  
Spare wheel  
Max 50 (80)  
420/60 420/60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
Specifications  
Plates and labels  
When consulting your Saab dealer, it may  
be necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N.,  
engine and gearbox numbers.  
1 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.  
2 Certification label.  
3 Gearbox number.  
4 Engine number.  
5 USA: Label for color codes (trim and  
body)  
Canada: Label for tire pressure and  
color codes (trim and body).  
6 Chassis number plate.  
7 Chassis number, stamped on body.  
8 Vehicle Emission Control Information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications 281  
position: 1  
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
6
|
7
|
8
|
9
|
10 11  
12  
|
|
|
V.I.N.:  
Y
S
3
E
F
4
9
E
6
4
3
045842  
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2
3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis details  
1 Region ___________ Y = Northern Europe  
2 Country __________ S = Sweden  
3 Manufacturer _____ 3 = Saab Automobile AB  
4 Product line ______ E = 9-5  
8 Engine variant _____ A = 2.3T  
E = 2.3t  
G = 2.3 Turbo  
9 Check digit ________ 0–9/X  
10 Model year ________ 4 = 2004  
11 Factory ___________ 3 = Trollhättan  
5 Model series ______ B = 9-5 Linear with driver’s and  
passenger-side airbags  
12 Serial number ______  
000001–999999  
D = 9-5 Arc with driver’s and  
passenger-side airbags  
H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and  
passenger-side airbags  
6 Body version _____ 4 = 4-door  
5 = 5-door  
7 Gearbox __________ 5 = Manual 5-speed  
9 = Automatic 5-speed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282  
Specifications  
Saab Information Display:  
Several of the systems in your Saab  
car can be adjusted to better fit your  
individual needs  
Some functions are governed by legal  
requirements and cannot therefore be  
reprogrammed.  
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for fur-  
ther information.  
Car alarm/central locking system:  
Following adjustments can be done  
by the driver:  
• Outdoor temperature display can be  
adjusted.  
Miscellaneous:  
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):  
To alter the preprogrammed ”AUTO” start  
upmodewithyourownpreferencesyoucan  
manually select the desired settings for:  
• Select the on-time for heated rear seat.  
• Coolant temperature gauge adjustment  
can be increased/decreased.  
• Fuel level gauge adjustment can be  
increased/decreased.  
• Additional sweep of the wipers after wind-  
shield washer function (ON or OFF).  
• Followmehomeon-timecanvary from20  
to 50 seconds.  
• Night panel illumination deactivation  
speed for the speedometer can be  
adjusted.  
Temperature.  
• Fan speed.  
• Air distribution.  
See ”Programming I” on page 81 and ”Pro-  
gramming II” on page 82.  
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 101):  
• The sound level of the sirenwhen locking/  
unlocking, HIGH or LOW.  
• The number of blinks when locking/  
unlocking, 1 to 7.  
• Automatic locking of the trunk when the  
carisdriven,1to8mph(2–14 km/h),YES  
or NO.  
• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while  
the car is driven, YES or NO.  
• Maximum starting volume (when the  
radio is switched on).  
Telephone volume (if the car is equipped  
with a phone connected to the audio sys-  
tem).  
• Speed dependent volume (volume  
increases or decreases with vehicle  
speed).  
• Automatic locking of the trunk after  
1 second–4 minutes if it has not been  
opened, YES or NO.  
• Loudness.  
Daytime Running Lights:  
• Automatic locking of the trunk when it is  
closed, YES or NO.  
• Automatic locking of all doors when the  
car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),  
YES or NO.  
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out  
fuse 35, see page 229.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index 283  
Automatic climate control (ACC) _____ 75  
Automatic transmission, technical  
data _________________________ 276  
Aviod theft, tip __________________ 197  
Carpeting, care of _______________ 253  
Cassette player __________________ 92  
Catalytic converter, important  
Index  
A
considerations _________________ 152  
Central locking ___________________ 40  
Change language in SID ___________ 68  
Change of address notification _____ 266  
Changing a wheel _______________ 247  
Changing bulbs _________________ 215  
Changing wiper blades ___________ 213  
Charger/Jump starting ____________ 193  
Charging the battery/Jump starting __ 193  
Chassis number ________________ 280  
Chassis number, key to ___________ 281  
Checks before towing a camper or  
trailer ________________________ 181  
Child safety _____________________ 23  
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 43  
Cleaning, engine bay _____________ 255  
Clock _______________________67, 68  
Color code, body ________________ 280  
Color code, trim _________________ 280  
Compact spare wheel ____________ 246  
Compass ______________________ 126  
Condensation, ACC _______________ 84  
Coolant _______________________ 207  
Courtesy Headlight Feature ________ 70  
Cruise control __________________ 167  
Cup holder _____________________ 134  
A/C system, fault diagnosis _______ 252  
A/C system, maintenance _________ 252  
ABS brakes ____________________ 168  
ACC __________________________ 75  
ACC functions ___________________ 78  
ACC, automatic climate control _____ 75  
ACC, calibration _________________ 83  
ACC, condensation _______________ 84  
ACC, programming _______________ 81  
ACC, useful tips _________________ 83  
Adjusting the steering wheel _______ 120  
Adjustment, seats ________________ 12  
Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis  
B
Battery ________________________ 210  
Battery charging/replacing ________ 211  
Battery, boost starting ____________ 191  
Before a long journey ____________ 258  
Before towing a camper or trailer ___ 181  
Belt guide ______________________ 17  
Boost starting using jump leads ____ 191  
Brake and clutch fluid ____________ 208  
Brake-fluid reservoir _____________ 208  
Brakes, technical data ____________ 277  
Bulbs, changing ________________ 215  
Bulbs, table of __________________ 226  
Buying new tires ________________ 235  
and maintenance ______________ 252  
Air distribution, ACC ______________ 80  
Airbag _________________________ 31  
Alarm _________________________ 46  
Alarm functions __________________ 49  
Alarm signals ________________ 46, 49  
Alternator _____________________ 212  
Alternator drive belt __________ 212, 275  
Alternator rating ________________ 275  
Anticorrosion treatment ___________ 256  
Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________ 125  
Ashtrays ______________________ 131  
Audio System ___________________ 85  
Audio System, quick guide _________ 87  
Autochecking of lights on starting ____ 60  
C
CD changer _____________________ 97  
CD player ______________________ 95  
CHECK messages _______________ 67  
CHECKING _____________________ 67  
Calibration, ACC _________________ 83  
Cancelling the programmed settings _ 81  
Car alarm ______________________ 46  
Car care ______________________ 199  
Cargo net, 9-5 Wagon ____________ 142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
284  
Index  
Engine bay ____________________ 201  
Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 255  
Engine number _________________ 280  
Engine oil, grade ________________ 273  
Engine, description ______________ 203  
Engine, technical data ____________ 272  
Engine, temperature gauge ________ 61  
Engine-oil level, checking _________ 204  
Event Data Recorder ____________ 267  
Expansion tank, coolant __________ 207  
D
G
DICE/TWICE ___________________ 228  
Dampers ______________________ 277  
Date code, tires _________________ 245  
Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 242  
Determining correct load, tires _____ 244  
Dim-dipped beam ________________ 69  
Direction indicators _______________ 71  
Door handles ___________________ 40  
Door mirrors ___________________ 121  
Doors, locks & luggage compartment _ 39  
Drive belt ______________________ 275  
Drive belt, alternator _____________ 212  
Drive belts, length _______________ 275  
Driver’s seat, programmable ________ 14  
Driving at night _________________ 185  
Driving in hot weather ____________ 177  
Driving with a load ______________ 185  
Garage door opener _____________ 122  
Gearbox number ________________ 280  
Gearbox oil, checking ____________ 206  
Gearbox, technical data, __________ 276  
Glove compartment ______________ 132  
H
Handbrake _____________________ 196  
Hazard warning lights _____________ 72  
Head restraint ___________________ 16  
Headlight flasher _________________ 69  
Headlights ______________________ 69  
Hood _________________________ 200  
Horn __________________________ 120  
F
Fault codes, Audio System ________ 106  
Flat spots, tires _________________ 234  
Fluid level, automatic transmission __ 206  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ___ 135  
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon ___ 138  
Frequently asked questions on airbag 37  
Front fog lights __________________ 72  
Frost warning ___________________ 64  
Fuel __________________________ 154  
Fuel consumption ________________ 63  
Fuel filler door __________________ 146  
Fuel gauge _____________________ 61  
Fuel grade _____________________ 272  
Fuse box under hood ____________ 231  
Fuse panel ____________________ 227  
Fuses ________________________ 227  
I
If a tire goes flat _________________ 239  
Ignition switch __________________ 148  
Immobilizer _____________________ 41  
Indicator and warning lights _________ 54  
Indicator lights ___________________ 54  
Instrument illumination ____________ 71  
Instruments and controls ___________ 53  
Interior equipment _______________ 119  
Interior lighting __________________ 130  
Interior rearview mirror ___________ 121  
E
EDR _________________________ 267  
ESP __________________________ 172  
Electric heating seat ______________ 15  
Electric heating, front seats ________ 15  
Electric windows ________________ 127  
Electrical system, technical data ____ 275  
Electronic Stability Program, ESP __ 172  
Electronic starting interlock _________ 41  
Emergency operation of sunroof ____ 129  
Emission control systems _________ 202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index 285  
J
N
Q
Jack _________________________ 249  
New tires, buying _______________ 235  
Night Panel _____________________ 67  
Quality grading, tires _____________ 237  
Questions on function of airbag ______ 37  
Quick guide, Audio System _________ 87  
K
O
Key ___________________________ 40  
Key to chassis number ___________ 281  
Key, remove ___________________ 148  
R
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 272  
Oil change, engine ______________ 204  
Oil specification _________________ 272  
OnStar ________________________ 107  
Outdoor temperature ______________ 63  
Owner assistance _______________ 265  
Radiator fan ____________________ 212  
Radio __________________________ 90  
Rain sensor _____________________ 73  
Rear fog light ____________________ 70  
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______ 135  
Rear seat, 9-5 Wagon, folding ______ 138  
Rear-seat head restraints __________ 16  
Rear-view mirror, antidazzle _______ 125  
Rearview mirrors ________________ 121  
Reclamation ___________________ 258  
Recommendations for cars with  
L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 24  
Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 240  
Labels __________________________ 7  
Leather upholstery, care of ________ 253  
Light horn ______________________ 69  
Light switches ___________________ 69  
Loading your vehicle _____________ 242  
Luggage-compartment lighting _____ 130  
P
Paintwork, touching-in ____________ 255  
Parking Assistance ______________ 194  
Parking lights ___________________ 69  
Plates and labels ________________ 280  
Poly-V-belt ____________________ 212  
Power steering _________________ 209  
Power-steering fluid _____________ 209  
Pressure gauge __________________ 62  
Programming I, ACC ______________ 81  
Programming II, ACC _____________ 82  
Programming the ACC ____________ 81  
automatic transmission, towing a  
camper or trailer _______________ 179  
Refuelling _____________________ 154  
Relay panel ____________________ 230  
Remote control __________________ 40  
Remote-control battery, changing ____ 43  
Remove the key ________________ 148  
Replacement, wheel _____________ 238  
Reporting safety defects __________ 266  
Reprogramming of systems _______ 282  
Reservoir, power-steering fluid _____ 209  
Rev counter _____________________ 60  
Reversing lights __________________ 72  
M
Main instrument panel ____________ 54  
Main/dipped beam _______________ 69  
Maintenance schedule ___________ 264  
Maintenance, A/C-system _________ 252  
Manual gearbox, technical data ____ 276  
Maxi fuses _____________________ 228  
Milometer ______________________ 60  
Motoring abroad ________________ 258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286  
Index  
Roof load _____________________ 183  
Running-in ____________________ 174  
Starting in cold weather, ACC _______ 81  
Starting in hot weather, ACC _______ 81  
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 120  
Steering, technical data __________ 277  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit _________________________ 244  
Stone-chip damage, repairing ______ 255  
Storage compartments ___________ 132  
Sun visors _____________________ 131  
Sunroof _______________________ 128  
Suspension ____________________ 277  
Suspension, technical data ________ 277  
Switches _______________________ 69  
Symboler ________________________ 9  
Systems, adjustment _____________ 282  
Tip, driving at night ______________ 185  
Tip, to avoid theft ________________ 197  
Tire chains _____________________ 239  
Tire date code __________________ 245  
Tire inspection and rotation ________ 234  
Tire markings ___________________ 241  
Tire pressure ___________________ 186  
Tire sidewall labeling _____________ 240  
Tire terminology and definitions ____ 242  
Tire, compact spare ______________ 246  
Tires _____________________233, 278  
Tires, winter ____________________ 278  
Tools _________________________ 145  
Touching-in the paintwork _________ 255  
Towbar attachment ______________ 178  
Towbar load ____________________ 182  
Towing the car __________________ 188  
Towing, automatics ______________ 188  
Traction _______________________ 171  
Trailer weights __________________ 271  
Treadwear indicators _____________ 235  
Trionic ________________________ 202  
Trip computer ___________________ 63  
Trip meter ______________________ 60  
Trunk _________________________ 135  
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 44  
Turbo gauge ____________________ 62  
Turbo, points to note _____________ 151  
S
SDM _________________________ 267  
SID ___________________________ 63  
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___________ 85  
Saab Information Display (SID) _____ 63  
Saab Parking Assistance _________ 194  
Safety belts _____________________ 17  
Safety belts, care of _____________ 253  
Safety-belt pretensioners __________ 18  
Safety-belt reminder ______________ 17  
Seats __________________________ 12  
Securing a load __________________ 44  
Selector lever indication, automatic  
T
transmission ___________________ 63  
Sentronic, manual mode __________ 163  
Service costs __________________ 265  
Service information ______________ 266  
Service intervals ________________ 264  
Service record retention __________ 265  
Settings, seats __________________ 12  
Side airbags ____________________ 35  
Signalling, horn _________________ 120  
Sliding floor, 9-5 Wagon __________ 143  
Snow chains ___________________ 176  
Spare wheel ___________________ 246  
Spare wheel and tools ___________ 145  
Spark plugs ____________________ 275  
Speedometer ________________ 60, 61  
TCS OFF _______________________ 59  
Table of fuses __________________ 229  
Tachometer _____________________ 60  
Tailgate, opening ________________ 44  
Tank gauge _____________________ 61  
Technical data __________________ 269  
Telematics _____________________ 107  
Temperature control, ACC _________ 77  
Temperature gauge, engine ________ 61  
Temperature zones, ACC __________ 77  
Textile carpeting ________________ 253  
Through-load hatch ______________ 137  
Tie Downs _____________________ 137  
Tightening torque, wheel studs _____ 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index 287  
U
W
Under the hood _________________ 201  
Uniform tire quality grading ________ 237  
Upholstery and trim ______________ 253  
Upholstery and trim, care of _______ 253  
Useful tips, ACC _________________ 83  
Warning labels ___________________ 7  
Warning light, AIR BAG ___________ 36  
Warning lights ___________________ 54  
Washers ______________________ 213  
Washers, windshield _____________ 214  
Washing the car ________________ 254  
Waxing and polishing ____________ 255  
Wear indicators, tires ____________ 235  
Wheel replacement ______________ 238  
Wheel, change _________________ 247  
Wheels and tires ________________ 278  
Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 278  
When it is time for new tires _______ 235  
Windshield washers ______________ 73  
Windshield wipers ________________ 73  
Winter tires ________________244, 278  
Wiper blades, replacing __________ 213  
Wipers and washers __________73, 213  
V
Vanity mirrors __________________ 131  
Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 267  
Ventilated front seats _____________ 15  
Viscosity, engine oil _____________ 272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288  
Index  
Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

PYLE Audio Turntable PLTTB3U User Guide
Raritan Computer Wireless Office Headset SW2 User Guide
Roberts Radio Radio R9939 User Guide
Rotel CD Player RCC 935 User Guide
Samsung Camcorder VP MM10SBL User Guide
Samsung Computer Drive 830 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven DE68 02065A User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator RF263BEAEBC User Guide
Samsung Stereo Amplifier VP D200I User Guide
Sega Video Games 10086611083 User Guide